Introduction

In this section, you can find the basic information about the product and also the formatting conventions used in the topics.

General Description

The Power Focus 6000 from Atlas Copco takes productivity, ergonomics, quality and connectivity to entirely new levels. And all this while minimizing environmental impact. The Power Focus 6000 connects a wide range of Atlas Copco assembly tools, giving you a single assembly platform in your station. With Virtual Stations each tool gets its own virtual controller that is easily addressed from overlying systems. The perfect option for your smart connected assembly operation.

Features

Connects a wide range of tool types

Virtual Stations – connect up to 6 tools to one controller

Web HMI – easy remote connection

Results, process information and programming on 7” touch screen

Dedicated factory network port, fieldbus slot, DIO and Open Protocol

IAM module that carries all controller software

On demand functionality via the Functionality Management System

Connectors protected behind lockable front door

Benefits

Increased flexibility in rebalancing assembly lines including integration of new tools

Streamlined communication to overlying interfaces

Easy installation with fewer cables, hardware components and network drops

State of the art connectivity through both WiFi and Bluetooth

Reduced inventory costs

Conventions

To enhance user understanding, certain formatting conventions are used throughout this document. The formatting conventions used are listed below.

User Guide Conventions

Element Notation Description Output

General emphasis In the Program workspace. To make certain text elements stand out, or to highlight. Text in Bold

Graphical User Interface (GUI) items

Select the Function button. Any reference to items found on screen in the GUI (for example, command buttons, icon names and field names).

Text in Bold

Graphical User Interface (GUI) Path >

Generally, on the top of the GUI. Navigation aid which keeps track of the location in the GUI. For example: Controller > Program > Edit

User input Enter a Description for the program. Any text input by the user. Text in Bold

File names Enter a File Name for the export. Files either exported from, or imported into the system. Text in Bold Italic

Variable and parameter names

Enter a Name for the export. Variable and parameter names (not values). Text in Italic

Variable and parameter values

Enter a VALUE for the export. Variable and parameter values. Text in BOLD CAPS

System output Client.Domain.Models.ExportImportConfiguration Any text output by the system. Text in Monospace

External links Links to external sites that have information connected to the document or subject content. These could include:

Selectable text to external sites

Technical Product Data

Dimensional Drawings

Accessories

Product Specific Information

Internal documentation links

Relevant Information - links to information which is directly related to the current topic and needs to be considered for certain configurations that are made.

Selectable text to internal content

In this Section - links to all the topics within the section, which can be useful when understanding a feature, or configuration.

If available, these links will be presented below the text.

General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

This product offers the possibility to process personal identifiable information such as system user name, role and IP-address. The purpose of this processing capability could be to enhance quality control through traceability and proper access management.

If you decide to process personal data you need to be aware of and comply with relevant personal data protection rules, including, in the EU the GDPR as well as other applicable laws, directives and regulations. Atlas Copco can in no way be held liable for any use made by you of the product.

Liability

Many events in the operating environment may affect the tightening process and shall require a validation of results. In compliance with applicable standards and/or regulations, we hereby require you to check the installed torque and rotational direction after any event that can influence the tightening result. Examples of such events include but are not limited to:

initial installation of the tooling system

change of part batch, bolt, screw batch, tool, software, configuration or environment

change of air- or electrical connections

change in line ergonomics, process, quality procedures or practices

changing of operator

any other change that influences the result of the tightening process

The check should:

Ensure that the joint conditions have not changed due to events of influence.

Be done after initial installation, maintenance or repair of the equipment.

Occur at least once per shift or at another suitable frequency.

Changing parameters may lead to a decrease in tool performance and may also slow down the production.

Risk of Property Damage or Severe Injury

Ensure that you read, understand and follow all instructions before operating the tool. Failure to follow all the instructions may result in electric shock, fire, property damage and/or severe bodily injury.

Read all Safety Information delivered together with the different parts of the system.

Read all Product Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the different parts of the system.

Read all locally legislated safety regulations regarding the system and parts thereof.

Save all Safety Information and instructions for future reference.

About the User Guide

The User Guide describes how to set up and configure the POWER FOCUS 6000.

It is intended for anyone operating or servicing the POWER FOCUS 6000.

In the Search window on the top menu bar, search for Product Essentials Tutorials for checking the available video tutorials.

Each Product Essentials Tutorial will provide an overview of how to do a specific task with an Atlas Copco product. These tutorials are designed so that users can watch and follow along with their own equipment. The Product Essentials Tutorials are available online to ensure they are always available to users on- demand, and provide baseline knowledge needed to work with Atlas Copco products.

Revision History

Reference Minimum Software version Description

3.4.1 Added or updated paragraphs:

Updated "Configuration > Working with Controller Tab > Software" paragraph

Updated "Working with Controller Tab > Export/Import" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Controller Tab > Export/Import > Exporting "All Controller Information"" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Controller Tab > Export/Import > Exporting "Settings and Configurations"" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Controller Tab > Export/Import > Exporting "Logs from Connected Tools"" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Controller Tab > Export/Import > Exporting "Results"" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Controller Tab > Export/Import > Importing Controller Configurations and Settings" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Controller Tab > Export/Import > Automated Backup" paragraph

Added "Introduction > Supported Tools" paragraph

Updated "Configuration > Working with Tightening Tab > Multistep Programs > Tightening Steps" paragraph

Updated "Configuration > Working with Tool Tab > Tool Motor Tuning" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Tool Tab > Open End Tuning" paragraph

Updated "Configuration > Working with Tightening Tab > Multistep Programs > Settings for a Multistep Program" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Tightening Tab > Multistep Programs > Tightening Steps > Trace Setting" paragraph

Added "Configuration > Working with Setting Tab > Configuration of the Network > Setting up the Firewall" paragraph

Updated "Configuration > Working with Configurations Tab > General Virtual Station" paragraph

Updated "Configuration > Working with Configurations Tab > Tool Configuration > Configuration of the Direction Switch" paragraph

Updated "Reports and Statistics > Working with the Reports Tab > Events > Event Codes" paragraph

Updated "Reports and Statistics > Working with the Reports Tab > Results > Stored Results" paragraph

3.3.X Added or updated paragraphs:

Updated "TrueAngle Compensation" paragraph

Updated "STwrench" paragraph

Updated "Configuration of the PIN Settings" paragraph

Added "External Result > Running the External Result Tightening Strategy with a Tool Connected" paragraph

Added "External Result > Running the External Result Tightening Strategy without a Tool Connected" paragraph

Updated "Tool Configuration" paragraph

Updated "TAG Check" paragraph

Updated "TAG Selection" paragraph

Added "Input Signals" paragraph

Added "Output Signals" paragraph

Added "Input/Output Signals" paragraph

Updated "Multistep Program > Tightening Steps" paragraph

Updated "Multistep Program > Step Monitors" paragraph

Updated "Multistep Program >Step Restrictions" paragraph

Added "Result Reporters" paragraph

Updated "Settings for a Multistep Program" paragraph

Added "Result View - Result Reporter" paragraph

Updated "Emergency Stop" paragraph

3.1.X Added or updated sections:

Updated Fieldbus Configuration settings

Updated General Virtual Station - Unlock tool on loosening

Updated Event Codes

3.1 Added or updated sections:

Updated license management

Copying pasting of tightening programs

Updated signal

Updated third party licenses

3.0 Added or updated sections:

License (FMS) chapter

StepSync chapter

Updated Multistep

Apply and Undo button for Tightening and Source Tightening

2.8 Added or updated sections:

Calibration using STa6000 or STpad

Configurable job counter

Decrement on OK

Scanner pass-through

2.7 Added or updated sections:

Updated multistep steps

Source Batch (barcode scanning)

Updated Event Codes for SRB and TBP tools

2.6 Added or updated sections

Multistep tightening strategy (Editor)

WLAN and Bluetooth for wireless tools

2.5 Added or updated sections:

Multistep tightening strategy

Selector confirm

Saved positions

General virtual station

Wifi socket selector

External OK

Service alarms for pulse tools

Manual mode virtual station

Reference Minimum Software version Description

2.4 Added or updated sections:

Settings: License manager

Settings: PIN code

Settings: Configure start screen

Tightening: Disable tightening, Measure angle to, Trigger lost, Torque tuning factor

Tool health and battery check

Controller health and battery check

Pulse strategies

3-step tightening

Device: Accessory bus

Device: Led ring

Device: EHMI

Device: Fieldbus diagnostics

Export/Import

2.3 Added or updated sections:

System settings: network configuration

System settings: preferences

System settings: protocol configuration

System settings: tightening

Tightening: Time monitoring and Torque tuning factor

ST Wrench

Sources

Accessory configuration: tool configuration, start condition, and socket selector configuration

System administration: Export/Import

Tool configuration; ST Wrench

Appendix A: Front connections

2.1 Added or updated sections:

Settings: Fieldbus

Controller menu - Tightening: Current monitoring and True angle compensation

Four step tightening

System administration: Exported csv file format

Virtual station: I/O diagnostics and Fieldbus

Appendix A: Emergency stop

2.0 Added or updated sections:

Settings: Tool alarms

Tool configuration: Tool connection, Tool maintenance, Internal Wlan for wireless tools

Tightening setup: Loosening step

Tightening results: Live results, Stored results, Status for NOK results

Virtual station

Event codes in Power Focus 6000

1.6 First official release of the configuration guide for Power Focus 6000.

Prerequisites

Anyone interested in learning more about POWER FOCUS 6000 can benefit from reading this User Guide.

For a complete understanding of the technical aspects described in the User Guide, we recommend the following:

Knowledge about tightening techniques

Experience of working with the previous versions of Power Focus

System Overview

Software Structure

Menu Overview

The controller has several menus available to configure tightening and hardware accessories, perform tool maintenance, administer software, and view reports.

Tightening Tab

The Tightening tab lists the Tightening programs stored on the controller that are available for an individual tightening. Tightening configurations are described in the Tightening tab.

Batch Sequence Tab

The Batch Sequence tab lists the batch sequences stored in the controller.

A Batch Sequence is one or more repetitive tightening programs in various combinations. Batch sequences are created and configured in the Batch sequence tab.

Sources Tab

The Sources tab lists the available options for controlling the selection of a tightening program (for example, a tightening program or a batch sequence, via digital input from different hardware). Scanner configurations are done in the Sources tab.

Tool Tab

The Tool tab provides information about the tools connected to the controller. This menu is also for wireless tools connected to the controller. Tool reference product, and when the tool was serviced and calibrated are some of the data available in the Tool tab.

Virtual Station Tab

The Virtual station tab configures the Virtual Stations.

The Virtual Station is a software abstraction of a controller system. In the Virtual station tab the different resources, accessories, tools and tasks are assigned to a Virtual Station.

Controller Tab

The Controller tab lists hardware and software components.

The software versions stored and used in the controller are listed and can be updated. The license manager for additional features is handled. It is also possible to import or export settings to and from the controller.

Configurations Tab

Список конфигураций аксессуаров приведен на вкладке «Конфигурации» .

Можно настроить такие аксессуары, как принадлежности для инструментов, расширитель ввода-вывода, внутренний ввод-вывод, Stacklight, панель оператора и селекторы гнезд. Цифровые сигналы ввода-вывода сопоставляются с кнопками, лампами, переключателями и разъемами.

Вкладка « Отчеты »

На вкладке «Отчеты» перечислены результаты и события ужесточения.

Вкладка « Настройки »

Вкладка «Настройки» используется для настройки специальных параметров контроллера, таких как язык, PIN-код, беспроводная сеть, полевая шина.

Вкладка « Назначение лицензии »

Вкладка «Назначение лицензий» используется для назначения лицензий и лицензионных функций виртуальным станциям.

Вкладка « Помощь »

Вкладка Help содержит полезные разделы справки о контроллере. Можно загрузить PDF-файлы на нескольких языках через компьютер, подключенный к контроллеру.

Краткое руководство пользователя

Для создания лучшего обзора системы в данной инструкции кратко описаны различные шаги, необходимые для начала использования системы.

1. Решите, какой инструмент использовать. Вид используемого инструмента влияет на доступность стратегий

затягивания.

1. Основная цель инструмента — выполнить затяжку. Это делается путем определения программы затяжки , которая

содержит все соответствующие параметры затяжки, например, целевой угол и целевой крутящий момент.

1. Одна или несколько программ затяжки могут быть добавлены в пакетную последовательность , которая работает

как серия программ затяжки. Пакетная последовательность может, например, представлять собой определенное количество затяжек с программой затяжки или последовательность различных программ затяжки.

1. Создайте виртуальную станцию ​ и назначьте ей инструмент. Виртуальная станция действует как интерфейс между

контроллером и инструментом, позволяя подключать несколько инструментов к одному физическому контроллеру. Виртуальная станция требуется, даже если к контроллеру подключен только один инструмент.

1. Назначьте задачу виртуальной станции. Задачей может быть программа затяжки, пакетная последовательность или

указанный цифровой вход (например, сканер штрих-кода). Инструмент, назначенный станции, теперь сможет выполнить задачу.

Структура оборудования

Эксплуатация и обслуживание

POWER FOCUS 6000 настраивается и конфигурируется с помощью передней панели контроллера. Также можно получить доступ к интерфейсу контроллера через веб-интерфейс, перейдя по IP-адресу контроллера на подключенном ПК.

Передняя панель

На передней панели расположен сенсорный дисплей и специальные кнопки.

1 Дисплей_Цветной дисплей с сенсорным экраном, отображающий виды конфигурации и результаты.

2 Специальные кнопки_Кнопки специальных функций

Кнопки на передней панели

Эти кнопки доступны в виде кликабельных значков в веб-интерфейсе.

Кнопка Имя Описание

Дом Перейдите на главный экран.

Результат Перейти к просмотру результатов в реальном времени.

Кнопки сенсорного экрана

Кнопка Имя Описание

Добавлять Добавляет дополнительный элемент.

Назад Вернуться к предыдущему виду.

Прокрутить вверх / Прокрутить вниз Переместите список, который слишком длинный для экрана.

Увеличить / Свернуть Развернуть или свернуть раздел с параметрами.

Назад (в списке) Переход назад (и вперед) между страницами списка.

Закрывать Нажмите, чтобы закрыть окно.

Уведомление Знак, показывающий, что параметр настроен неправильно.

Дом Перейдите на главный экран.

Доступно только в веб-интерфейсе.

Перейти Результат Перейдите на экран с результатами в реальном времени.

Доступно только в веб-интерфейсе.

Навигация

Для навигации по графическому интерфейсу контроллера коснитесь элемента меню или проведите пальцем (перетащите) по дисплею, чтобы прокрутить элементы.

Параметры выбираются нажатием на требуемый параметр.

Чтобы ввести данные в текстовое поле, коснитесь его, и на дисплее появится клавиатура.

Веб - интерфейс

Веб-интерфейс очень похож на дисплей контроллера. Он позволяет настраивать и программировать контроллер через веб-браузер на компьютере, подключенном к контроллеру.

Пользователи могут программировать контроллер одновременно с контроллера и через веб-интерфейс.

Введение в лицензию

Лицензии на функции контроллера управляются через Систему управления функциональностью (FMS). Это позволяет клиентам адаптировать функции контроллера к своим конкретным потребностям с помощью динамической схемы лицензирования.

Лицензии можно получить для отдельных функций или наборов функций и можно развернуть на нескольких виртуальных станциях. Лицензии можно вернуть в пул, когда они больше не требуются. Лицензии можно получить через Atlas Copco License Portal (ACLP). Лицензии можно загрузить с ACLP и управлять ими/распространять через ToolsTalk или можно сохранить на FMS Portable (USB-накопитель) для вставки в контроллер.

Обзор лицензий

Конфигурация функций, регулируемых лицензиями, может быть выполнена даже при отсутствии установленной лицензии. Например, конфигурация программ затяжки и конфигурация многошаговых программ. Назначение этих функций инструменту или виртуальной станции также возможно. Однако запуск функции без действительной лицензии потребует установки соответствующей лицензии.

Лицензионное обеспечение выполняется на двух этапах: назначение и время выполнения (нажатие триггера). Если функция, для которой не установлена ​ лицензия, назначена виртуальной станции, в представлении виртуальной станции в ToolsTalk 2 появится красный восклицательный знак. Графический интерфейс контроллера также отобразит предупреждающий треугольник в разделе инструмента или задачи (в зависимости от того, что отсутствует). Если функция, для которой не установлена ​ лицензия, запущена (т. е. нажат триггер), пользователю будет представлено событие, информирующее пользователя о том, какая лицензия отсутствует. Продолжение будет невозможно без установленной правильной лицензии.

Запуск нелицензированной функции в большинстве случаев приведет к блокировке инструмента.

Многие функции и возможности контроллера требуют лицензии для назначения и использования виртуальной станцией. Существует три типа лицензий:

Тип виртуальной станции

Фиксированный набор функций, объединенных в один пакет. Тип виртуальной станции определяет, среди прочего, какие инструменты могут быть запущены, сколько программ и последовательностей может быть использовано, какие стратегии затягивания доступны и тип отчетности, которая может быть сделана. Функции, содержащиеся в каждом типе виртуальной станции, — это функции, которые часто используются совместно друг с другом или которые имеют внутренние зависимости, требующие наличия других функций в пакете. Типы виртуальных станций назначаются в полном объеме виртуальной станции. Затем виртуальная станция может использовать все функции, содержащиеся в типе виртуальной станции. Чтобы иметь возможность выполнять затягивания, виртуальной станции должна быть назначена лицензия типа виртуальной станции. В зависимости от типа лицензии будут включены или заблокированы различные параметры затягивания.

Функция виртуальной станции

Отдельные функции, которые могут дополнять типы виртуальных станций. Многие функции можно приобрести как одну лицензию.

Функция контроллера

Функции, которые являются общими для контроллера. Это такие функции, как Soft PLC и Step Sync, которые назначаются контроллеру и после назначения могут использоваться всеми виртуальными станциями на этом контроллере.

Источники лицензии

Лицензии, используемые на контроллере, могут быть получены из нескольких различных источников. Количество одновременных источников ограничено 10 (либо 10 источников FMS Portable, либо один сервер лицензий (TT2) в дополнение к 9 источникам FMS Portable). Если вы хотите добавить лицензии из источника, когда достигнут предел источника (10), все лицензии из одного источника необходимо удалить из контроллера, чтобы освободить место для лицензий из другого источника.

Обзор источника

Вкладка Обзор источника ( Назначение лицензии > Обзор источника ) предоставляет пользователю обзор лицензий, установленных на контроллере, а также откуда они были установлены. Здесь может отображаться максимум 10 различных источников, и каждый будет обозначен как FMS P (для FMS Portable или dongle) или License Server (TT2).

Нажатие на любой источник лицензии представит подробную информацию об источнике лицензии этого источника. В ней перечислены имя и тип источника, а также количество и тип лицензий в каждой категории (тип виртуальной станции, функция виртуальной станции и функция контроллера).

Поддерживаемые инструменты

Инструменты, поддерживаемые виртуальной станцией, могут различаться в зависимости от типа виртуальной станции на контроллере.

Поддерживаемые инструменты Пакетный контроль JointControl StationControl КритическийКонтроль ProcessControl

БКП/БКП Х - - - -

ТензорСБ - Х Х - -

ТензорSL - - Х Х Х

ТВП - - Х Х Х

ТензорСТ - - Х Х Х

ТензорSTR - - Х Х Х

СРБ - - Х Х Х

ТензорSTB - - Х Х Х

STWrench - - Х Х Х

ТензорES - Х Х - -

ТензорSR - - Х Х Х

QST (фиксированный шпиндель) - - Х Х Х

ТБПС - Х Х - -

MWR-S (мехатронный сигнал гаечного ключа) - - - - -

MWR-T (Мехатронный динамометрический ключ) Х Х Х Х -

MWR-TA (угол крутящего момента мехатронного ключа) - - Х Х Х

Внешний инструмент Х Х Х Х Х

Установка и обновление

В этом разделе вы найдете информацию, которая поможет вам при первоначальной установке продукта или обновлении с одной версии на другую.

Установка лицензии

Установка лицензий на контроллер

Перед установкой лицензий через сервер (ToolsTalk 2) убедитесь, что время контроллера синхронизировано со временем сервера.

Установка с сервера

Распространение серверных лицензий осуществляется через ToolsTalk 2. Инструкции по установке лицензий см. в Руководстве пользователя ToolsTalk 2.

Чтобы иметь возможность устанавливать лицензии с помощью ToolsTalk 2, необходимо настроить правильный сервер лицензий:

1. Выберите меню «Настройки» и вкладку «Подключения к серверу» .

1. В поле Atlas Copco License Manager установите переключатель в положение Вкл .

1. Введите правильный IP-адрес хоста сервера (обычно тот же, что и IP-адрес для ToolsTalk 2) и порт сервера.

1. Выберите Применить .

Установка с FMS Portable (USB)

Система управления функциями (FMS) использует специальное устройство FMS Portable для передачи функций на контроллер и с него. USB-флеш- накопитель содержит как область памяти общего назначения, так и доверенную область хранения, доступ к которой возможен только с помощью менеджера лицензий в контроллере. Приобретенные элементы функций загружаются из Atlas Copco в область общего назначения. При первой установке FMS Portable в контроллер с менеджером лицензий файл обнаруживается и декодируется, а элементы функций переносятся в доверенную область хранения, доступ к которой возможен только с помощью менеджера лицензий.

Если у вас есть USB-накопитель с установленными лицензиями, выполните следующие действия, чтобы установить их на контроллер.

1. Вставьте USB-накопитель в USB-порт контроллера.

В графическом интерфейсе пользователя появится окно USB License Management. В столбце Pool будет показано общее количество лицензий на контроллере из всех источников. В столбце Available on FMS P показаны лицензии, доступные на этом ключе, а в столбце From this FMS P показано количество лицензий, которые были перемещены на этот контроллер из этого конкретного FMS P.

1. Выберите стрелку, указывающую влево, рядом с лицензией, которую вы хотите установить на контроллер.

Число в столбце «Доступно в FMS P» уменьшится на 1, а число в столбце «Из этого FMS P» увеличится на 1.

Пользователю будут представлены события на контроллере как для начала, так и для окончания передачи лицензии.

Синхронизация лицензии

Существующие лицензии проверяются на сервере лицензий каждые два часа. Если в течение 14 дней не получен ответ от сервера лицензий, затронутые лицензии будут отозваны. Пользователь также будет предупрежден, когда срок действия лицензий истекает. Если до истечения срока действия лицензии остается 7 дней, пользователю будет показано предупреждение каждые два часа. Если лицензии не продлеваются, они истекают, и затронутые функции больше не будут доступны.

Удаление лицензий из контроллера

Описан один из способов удаления лицензий, установленных на переносной версии FMS. Инструкции по удалению лицензий, установленных на сервере, см. в Руководстве пользователя ToolsTalk 2 .

Удаление лицензий FMS Portable-Installed

1. Убедитесь, что FMS Portable вставлен в USB-порт контроллера.

1. [Если окно USB License Manager не отображается] Выберите меню License Assignment .

1. Выберите значок USB в правом верхнем углу окна.

Откроется окно USB License Manager.

1. Выберите стрелку вправо рядом с лицензией, которую вы хотите удалить из контроллера.

Лицензии, назначенные виртуальным станциям, можно удалить из контроллера. Однако в результате виртуальная станция станет непригодной для использования.

Конфигурация

В этом разделе вы найдете подробную информацию о том, как создавать, изменять и проверять настройки продукта.

Работа с вкладкой « Затяжка »

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ

Риск получения травмы

Изменение конфигурации программы затяжки может вызвать неожиданный крутящий момент, направление вращения или скорость в системе(ах), где в данный момент используется программа затяжки. Это может привести к серьезным телесным повреждениям и/или повреждению имущества.

Проверяйте конфигурации программы затяжки после добавления новой программы или после внесения изменений в существующую программу.

Изменения, внесенные в программы стягивания в любом разделе, должны быть активно применены путем нажатия кнопки «Применить» в правом нижнем углу графического интерфейса. В качестве альтернативы изменения можно отменить, нажав кнопку «Отменить» в том же месте.

При выходе из раздела, в котором были сделаны изменения (с помощью кнопок Назад, Домой или Результат), пользователю будет показано всплывающее окно с предупреждением, в котором изменения также могут быть применены или отменены. Пользователь не может продолжить, не применив или не отменив изменения.

Функции контроллера, такие как стратегии ужесточения низкой реакции и функции контроллера в целом, среди прочих, требуют лицензий, распространяемых через Систему управления функциональностью (FMS). В то время как настройка функций возможна без специальных лицензий, назначение и использование этих функций потребует установки правильной лицензии на контроллере. Более подробную информацию о лицензиях см. в разделе Лицензии (FMS).

Для выполнения затяжки программам POWER FOCUS 6000 необходимо задать параметры. Выбор стратегии и либо целевого крутящего момента , либо целевого угла является обязательным. Другие настройки являются необязательными, например, плавный пуск , самонарезка и компенсация крутящего момента . Также можно контролировать затяжку по мере ее выполнения, добавляя пределы, в которых крутящий момент или угол поворота гайки должны оставаться.

Процедура затяжки делится на четыре этапа: запуск, затягивание, остановка.

Программы ужесточения

Выбрав программу затяжки, можно выбрать метод приложения силы зажима (или предварительной нагрузки) к соединению. Различные соединения требуют разных стратегий для того, как применить желаемую силу зажима и минимизировать нежелательные эффекты в процессе эксплуатации.

Стратегия TurboTight позволяет использовать ручное программирование или быстрое программирование — для получения дополнительной информации см. параграф TurboTight.

Стратегии «Быстрый шаг» , «Двухшаговый» и «Трехшаговый» позволяют выбирать затяжку до целевого момента или целевого угла.

Четырехшаговая стратегия — это настраиваемая стратегия, в которой можно выбрать использование всех или только некоторых из доступных шагов. Более подробную информацию см. в параграфе Четырехшаговая стратегия ужесточения.

Стратегия внешнего результата используется, когда внешний цифровой сигнал указывает на исправность затяжки — более подробную информацию см. в параграфе Внешний результат.

Все программы затяжки требуют, чтобы вы, как минимум, установили значение целевого крутящего момента или целевого угла .

Значение по умолчанию

Параметр Описание

Стратегия Доступны программы подтяжки.

TurboTight

TurboTight : Никакое дополнительное поведение затягивания не используется по умолчанию. Используются только целевые значения.

Быстрый шаг : добавляет начальный шаг затяжки для уменьшения разброса предварительной нагрузки.

Двухэтапный : добавляет паузу между первым и последним этапом затягивания для дальнейшего противодействия кратковременному эффекту расслабления.

Три шага : затягивание до определенного значения первого момента затяжки, затем ослабление винта и немедленное повторное затягивание его до целевого момента затяжки или целевого угла.

Четыре шага : Стратегия затягивания, разделенная на четыре отдельных шага. Возможно отключение шагов по отдельности.

Гаечный ключ - производство : Стратегия затяжки, используемая с гаечным ключом ST.

Гаечный ключ - качество : Стратегия, используемая для проверки качества затяжки с помощью гаечного ключа ST.

Вращение : вращает шпиндель с указанной скоростью и на указанный угол.

Внешний результат : представляет собой заранее определенный результат затяжки вместо измеренного крутящего момента/ угла.

Многошаговая : стратегия ужесточения, состоящая из нескольких настраиваемых шагов с ограничениями и мониторами.

Тип цели Определяет тип целевого значения на последнем шаге.

Целевой крутящий момент: затяжка направлена ​ на достижение заданного целевого значения при выполнении последнего шага.

Целевой угол: затяжка направлена ​ на достижение указанного целевого значения при выполнении последнего шага.

Определяет целевой момент затяжки последнего шага.

Целевой крутящий момент

Угол цели Определяет целевой угол затяжки последнего шага.

Скорость цели Активирует настройку скорости инструмента для последнего шага вручную или с использованием скорости по умолчанию.

Авто

Авто: использует значение, рассчитанное на основе максимальной скорости инструмента .

Ручной: Укажите скорость инструмента вручную.

<Руководство> Скорость инструмента во время затяжки или на заключительном этапе.

TurboTight

TurboTight — это стратегия затяжки по умолчанию, которая разработана для выполнения очень быстрой и эргономичной затяжки на основе максимальной скорости инструмента (Tool max speed). У этой стратегии есть два варианта:

Быстрая программа , требующая только установки целевого крутящего момента для выполнения затяжки.

Руководство , позволяющее пользователю настраивать несколько параметров затяжки.

Чтобы свести к минимуму риск неожиданного рывка в конце затяжки при использовании стратегии затяжки TurboTight, обязательно активируйте функцию контроля времени.

Чтобы свести к минимуму риск неожиданного рывка в конце затяжки при использовании стратегии затяжки TurboTight, обязательно установите максимальный предел времени.

Time Max Limit включен по умолчанию, но необходимо настроить соответствующие значения. На этапе затяжки установите Angle Limit на From Rundown Complete . Установите Time Max как можно ниже, не останавливая обычную затяжку. На этапе затяжки установите Rundown Complete Torque так, чтобы он срабатывал, когда крутящий момент начинает увеличиваться.

В зависимости от свойств соединения, например, если соединение очень жесткое или очень мягкое, может потребоваться иная стратегия затяжки, нежели TurboTight.

TurboTight недоступен для Joint Control.

Тонкая настройка стратегии TurboTight

Стратегия затяжки TurboTight указывает на целевой крутящий момент, и результат может быть ниже или выше целевого. Самым важным параметром для стратегии затяжки TurboTight является скорость. Можно поддерживать максимальную скорость для большинства затяжек, но если все/некоторые затяжки превышают заданную, уменьшайте скорость небольшими шагами. Rundown Complete Torque не используется для управления затяжкой; он используется только для расчета пределов и результатов.

Быстрый шаг

Быстрый шаг — это стратегия затяжки, используемая для уменьшения разброса предварительной нагрузки соединения путем добавления начального шага с заданным крутящим моментом и скоростью, а затем снижения целевой скорости на последнем шаге.

Параметр Описание Значение по умолчанию

Первый крутящий момент Целевой крутящий момент для первого шага.

Первый крутящий момент Крутящий момент на первом этапе. 80% от целевого крутящего момента

Первая скорость Целевая скорость для первого шага.

Первая скорость Скорость инструмента на первом этапе. 50% от максимальной скорости инструмента

Два шага

Стратегия «Двух шагов» очень похожа на стратегию «Быстрых шагов», за исключением того, что она добавляет небольшую задержку между первым и последним шагом, чтобы дополнительно противодействовать кратковременным эффектам расслабления в суставе.

Параметр Описание Значение по умолчанию

Первый крутящий момент Крутящий момент на первом этапе. 80% от целевого крутящего момента

Первая скорость Целевая скорость для первого шага.

Параметр Описание Значение по умолчанию

Время паузы Время между первым и вторым шагом. 50 мс

Тонкая настройка двухэтапной стратегии

При достижении первой цели инструмент немедленно останавливается на определенное время, прежде чем продолжить последний шаг. Значение первого крутящего момента и время паузы следует выбирать для улучшения эргономики ручных инструментов.

Три шага

Стратегия трех шагов добавляет шаг ослабления между первым и последним шагом, чтобы преодолеть краткосрочные эффекты релаксации из-за внедрения и уменьшить разброс предварительной нагрузки. Иногда это используется для кондиционирования соединения. Это может быть полезно, например, в соединениях со многими прилегающими поверхностями и будет иметь больший эффект на новых деталях, чем на повторно используемых, из- за сглаживания поверхностей, что уменьшает внедрение.

Подготовка соединения выполняется путем затягивания первой ступени до заданного момента, первого момента , а затем снятия нагрузки путем поворота гайки на заданный угол подготовки , а затем повторной затяжки гайки до ее целевого момента или целевого угла .

Целевой крутящий момент может быть ниже крутящего момента, достигнутого на первом этапе после выбега. Для того чтобы целевой крутящий момент был ниже первого крутящего момента, установите целевой крутящий момент (Параметры затяжки > Этап затяжки > Последний этап > Целевой крутящий момент) на значение ниже, чем Первый крутящий момент (Параметры затяжки > Этап затяжки > Первый этап > Первый крутящий момент).

Если в программе затяжки в качестве целевого значения используется угол, целевой угол измеряется от положения в конце этапа ослабления (кондиционирования).

Поведение измерения крутящего момента и измерения угла к

Значение максимального крутящего момента и значение пикового крутящего момента, измеренные в разделе Оценка результата для Измерения крутящего момента при и Измерения угла до, соответственно, представляют собой самые высокие значения, измеренные за все время затяжки. Это означает, что если целевой крутящий момент установлен ниже первого крутящего момента, значение оценки результата будет выше конечного значения. Чтобы просмотреть окончательное значение затяжки, оба параметра Измерения крутящего момента при и Измерения угла до должны быть установлены на Значение при отключении.

Параметр Описание Значение по умолчанию

Первый крутящий момент Крутящий момент на первом этапе. 80% от целевого крутящего момента

Первая скорость Скорость инструмента на первом этапе. 50% от максимальной скорости инструмента

Скорость кондиционирования Скорость инструмента на этапе кондиционирования. 50% от максимальной скорости инструмента

Угол кондиционирования Угол поворота гнезда на этапе кондиционирования. 180°

Тонкая настройка трехшаговой стратегии

Когда достигается первая цель и вводится этап кондиционирования, инструмент немедленно останавливается и разворачивается, прежде чем продолжить последний этап. Этот этап кондиционирования может потребовать тонкой настройки для улучшения эргономики ручных инструментов.

Четыре шага

Четырехэтапная стратегия затяжки разделена на отдельные шаги, которые можно включать и выключать для настройки задачи затяжки.

Каждый шаг имеет целевое значение и может контролировать другие значения и делится следующим образом:

Шаг Функция

Начинать Начальный этап используется для зацепления резьбы и определения того, произошло ли уже затягивание.

Наезжать Шаг завинчивания используется для завинчивания винта до нужного уровня.

Затягивание Этап затяжки используется для затягивания винта до определенного уровня крутящего момента и может быть разделен на несколько этапов. Это конечное целевое значение может быть либо целевым крутящим моментом, либо целевым углом.

Останавливаться Остановочный этап заключается в завершении затяжки эргономичным способом.

Пример 1: Если начальный и нижний этапы используются для затягивания винта до плотного прилегания, окончательную затяжку можно выполнить на более позднем этапе.

Пример 2: Если этапы затяжки использовались при предыдущей плотной затяжке, можно выполнить окончательную сборку, чтобы затянуть соединение до конечного целевого значения.

Обзор стратегии четырех шагов

Графическое представление различных шагов и кривых скорости, крутящего момента и угла поворота, наблюдаемых с течением времени.

Графическое представление используется в документации для описания настройки конфигурации и значения значений параметров. Графики не используются ни в одном графическом интерфейсе.

Четырехшаговая стратегия

А Начать шаг

Б Шаг изложения

С Первый шаг этапа затягивания

Д Заключительный этап этапа затягивания

Э Стоп шаг

Ф Кривая скорости во времени

Г Кривая зависимости крутящего момента от времени

ЧАС Кривая зависимости угла от времени

я Направление времени

Каждый шаг настроен относительно крутящего момента, угла, времени и скорости инструмента. Каждый шаг имеет одно целевое значение, которое является либо крутящим моментом, либо углом, и контролирует другие значения.

Различные шаги и их целевые значения:

Шаг Функция

Начинать Цель = Угол

Этап используется для зацепления резьбы и определения того, произошло ли уже затягивание.

Можно контролировать пределы времени, угла и крутящего момента.

Наезжать Цель = Крутящий момент

Ступенька используется для завинчивания винта или гайки до плотного прилегания с определенным значением крутящего момента.

Можно контролировать пределы времени, угла и крутящего момента.

Затягивание Этап затяжки делится на два этапа: первая затяжка и окончательная затяжка .

Первая цель затяжки = Крутящий момент . Шаг используется для затяжки винта или гайки до определенного первого целевого уровня крутящего момента.

Конечный целевой показатель затяжки = Угол или Крутящий момент. Шаг используется для продолжения затяжки от первого целевого показателя затяжки до конечного целевого угла или до более высокого конечного целевого крутящего момента.

Можно контролировать пределы времени, угла и крутящего момента.

Останавливаться Шаг «Стоп» завершает затяжку, позволяя отпустить гнездо.

Определение параметра

Различные параметры управляют четырехшаговой стратегией. Для иллюстрации параметров и их положения они показаны на объединенной кривой скорости по времени, кривой угла по времени и кривой крутящего момента по времени.

Графическое представление используется в документации для описания настройки конфигурации и значения значений параметров. Графики не используются ни в одном графическом интерфейсе.

Четырехэтапная стратегия ужесточения - все параметры

А Начальный этап

Б Этап изнурения

С Этап затягивания: первый шаг

Д Этап затяжки: Заключительный этап

Э Остановить этап

Параметры для четырехэтапного затягивания – начальный этап

Время, крутящий момент и угол контролируются на этапе запуска. Этот этап имеет угол в качестве цели.

Графическое представление используется в документации для описания настройки конфигурации и интерпретации значений параметров. Графики не используются ни в одном графическом интерфейсе.

Шаг определяется от нажатия на курок до достижения заданного целевого угла.

А Нажатие на курок

Б Угол макс. (монитор)

С Угол мин. (монитор)

Д Конец начального шага

Э Целевой угол для начального шага

Ф Время мин (монитор)

Г Время макс. (монитор)

ЧАС Угол кривизны

Дж. Кривая скорости

К Максимальное значение крутящего момента (монитор)

В таблицах перечислены все доступные параметры. Некоторые параметры доступны и видны только для определенных функций.

Значение по умолчанию

Параметр Описание

Направление Направление вращения при затяжке.

CW

CW: По часовой стрелке

CCW: Против часовой стрелки

Текущий мониторинг Выкл.: Текущий мониторинг отключен, крутящий момент инструмента измеряется датчиком крутящего момента.

Вкл: ток измеряется при конечном крутящем моменте и преобразуется в значение крутящего момента. Рассчитанный крутящий момент сравнивается с измеренным крутящим моментом. Если разница находится в пределах 10%, затяжка считается выполненной

Переключатель с положением «Вкл» или «Выкл» . Выключенный

Компенсация истинного угла

Отрицательно Видно только если компенсация истинного угла включена.

Определяет максимальный отрицательный поворот инструмента. При превышении этого значения затягивание прекращается и выдается сообщение об ошибке. Это выражается числовым значением угла.

Положительный Видно только если компенсация истинного угла включена.

Определяет максимальное положительное вращение инструмента. При превышении этого значения затягивание прекращается и выдается сообщение об ошибке. Это выражается числовым значением угла.

Включена настройка вложений

Да

Нет

Нет

Значение по умолчанию

Параметр Описание

Мягкий старт Вкл.: Плавный пуск обеспечивает плавный пуск на низкой скорости. Используется для зацепления резьбы.

На

Выкл.: Скорость инструмента максимально быстро увеличивается до скорости торможения.

Скорость Определяет скорость при плавном пуске. 34

Угол Целевой угол для шага.

Конец шага определяется в этой точке, когда достигается цель.

Угол мин. Контролирует значение угла и проверяет, находится ли результат в пределах допустимого. 70

Угол макс. Контролирует значение угла и проверяет, находится ли результат в пределах допустимого. 110

Крутящий момент мин. Определяет нижний предел крутящего момента при плавном пуске. Если Torque min падает ниже предела, затяжка прерывается и выдается сообщение об ошибке. Затяжка будет считаться неудовлетворительной.

0.00

Максимальный крутящий момент

Определяет верхний предел крутящего момента при плавном пуске. Если Torque max превышен, затяжка прерывается и выдается сообщение об ошибке. Затяжка будет считаться неудовлетворительной.

1.25

Время мин. Минимальное время для шага. измеряется от нажатия на курок. Выражается в числовом значении миллисекунд. 100.00

Время макс. Максимальное время для шага. измеряется от нажатия на курок. Выражается в числовом значении миллисекунд. 500.00

Использовать настройку вложений

Да

Нет

Нет

Передаточное отношение Видно только в том случае, если для параметра «Использовать настройку вложений» установлено значение «Да» .

1.00

Мин./Макс. значения: 0,5/4,0

Передаточное отношение необходимо для компенсации угла и крутящего момента. Передаточное отношение будет влиять на максимальную скорость и максимальный крутящий момент инструмента.

При переключении между параметром Использовать настройку навесного оборудования Да/Нет значения передаточного числа не сбрасываются до значений по умолчанию.

Видно только в том случае, если для параметра «Использовать настройку вложений» установлено значение «Да» .

Настройка эффективности

1.00

Мин./Макс. значения: 0,5/1,0

Устанавливает потерю эффективности для навесного оборудования. Передаточное отношение в сочетании с настройкой эффективности необходимо для компенсации крутящего момента.

При переключении между параметром Использовать настройку навесного оборудования Да/Нет значения настройки Эффективность не сбрасываются до значений по умолчанию.

Параметры для четырехэтапного затягивания - этап затягивания

Шаг Rundown начинается с момента зацепления резьбы и заканчивается, когда головка винта достигает уровня плотного прилегания. Во время Rundown отслеживаются время, крутящий момент и угол. Целевое значение для шага — это момент, когда достигается уровень крутящего момента Rundown complete .

Графическое представление используется в документации для описания настройки конфигурации и интерпретации значений параметров. Графики не используются ни в одном графическом интерфейсе.

Четырехэтапная затяжка - параметры на этапе затягивания

А Начало шага обзора

Б Максимальный уровень крутящего момента (монитор)

С Кривая скорости

Д Минимальный угол (контроль); Измеряется от угла закручивания, контроль крутящего момента

Э Максимальный угол (контроль); Измеряется от крутящего момента контроля угла закручивания

Ф Значение крутящего момента при полном затягивании

Г Время макс. (монитор)

ЧАС Время мин (монитор)

Дж. Кривая крутящего момента и контрольная точка крутящего момента угла выбега

К Конец этапа выбега, когда достигается целевое значение

Л Минимальный уровень крутящего момента (монитор)

Параметр Описание Значение по умолчанию

Наезжать Переключатель с положением «Вкл» или «Выкл» .

На

Если переключатель находится в положении «Выкл.» , шаг не выполняется, а все остальные параметры невидимы и игнорируются.

Если отключены как начальный этап, так и этап выбега, то окончательную затяжку можно выполнить как отдельную задачу.

Значение по умолчанию

Параметр Описание

Скорость выбега Если установлено максимальное положение, скорость устанавливается на уровне полной производительности инструмента.

Макс

В положении «Ручной» скорость устанавливается вручную.

Скорость выбега (поле ввода параметров)

Это поле ввода параметров отображается только при выборе ручной настройки скорости.

690 об/мин

Скорость вращения шпинделя во время шага.

Крутящий момент мин. (монитор) Минимальное значение крутящего момента на этапе. 0 Нм

Макс. крутящий момент (монитор) Максимальное значение крутящего момента на этапе. 6 Нм

Крутящий момент контроля угла выбега

Заданное значение крутящего момента. С этого момента времени начинается контроль угла. 0 Нм

Угол мин. (монитор) Минимальное вращение шпинделя для шага. Измеряется от момента контроля угла забега . 100 градусов

Угол макс. (монитор) Максимальное вращение шпинделя для шага. Измеряется от угла забега, контроль крутящего момента . 5000 градусов

Время мин (монитор) Минимальное время шага. Измеряется от начала шага. 10 мс

Время макс. (монитор) Максимальное время шага. Измеряется от начала шага. 5000 мс

Полный крутящий момент Определяет целевой крутящий момент для шага выбега.

5 Нм

Конец шага определяется в этой точке, когда достигается целевое значение.

Параметры для четырехэтапной затяжки - Стадия затяжки

Этап затяжки делится на два этапа: первый этап и последний этап. Первый этап затяжки начинается с полного закручивания и заканчивается достижением первого целевого уровня крутящего момента. Во время первой затяжки отслеживаются время, крутящий момент и угол.

Графическое представление используется в документации для описания настройки конфигурации и интерпретации значений параметров. Графики не используются ни в одном графическом интерфейсе.

Четырехэтапная затяжка - параметры на первом этапе затяжки

А Начало первого шага затяжки на этапе затяжки

Б Мин. угол (контроль); Измеряется от первого угла, контроль крутящего момента

С Максимальный угол (контроль); Измеряется от первого угла, контроль крутящего момента

Д Максимальный уровень крутящего момента (монитор)

Э Первое значение момента затяжки; определяет целевое значение и конец шага.

Ф Конец шага

Г Время макс. (монитор)

ЧАС Время мин (монитор)

Дж. Кривая скорости

К Кривая крутящего момента и контрольная точка крутящего момента первого угла

Л Минимальный крутящий момент (монитор)

Значение по умолчанию

Параметр Описание

Первый шаг Если переключатель находится в положении «Выкл.» , шаг не выполняется, а все остальные параметры невидимы и игнорируются.

На

Первый крутящий момент Определяет целевой крутящий момент для шага.

20 Нм

Конец шага определяется в этой точке, когда достигается цель.

Первая скорость В положении «Авто» скорость устанавливается автоматически.

Авто

В положении «Ручной» скорость устанавливается вручную.

Первая скорость (поле ввода параметров)

Это поле ввода параметров отображается только при выборе ручной настройки скорости.

345 об/мин

Скорость вращения шпинделя во время шага.

Первый крутящий момент мин. Минимальное значение крутящего момента на этапе. 19 Нм

Первый крутящий момент макс. Максимальное значение крутящего момента на этапе. 21 Нм

Крутящий момент контроля первого угла

Заданное значение крутящего момента. С этого момента времени начинается контроль угла. 5 Нм

Первый угол мин. Минимальное вращение шпинделя для шага. Измеряется от первого угла контроля крутящего момента . 0 градусов

Значение по умолчанию

Параметр Описание

Первый угол макс. Максимальное вращение шпинделя для шага. Измеряется от первого угла контроля крутящего момента . 500 градусов

Время мин. Минимальное время шага. Измеряется от начала шага. 10 мс

Время макс. Максимальное время шага. Измеряется от начала шага. 500 мс

Измерьте крутящий момент при Максимальное значение крутящего момента

Значение при пиковом угле

Значение при выключении

Параметры для четырехэтапной затяжки – заключительный этап затяжки

Этап затяжки делится на два этапа: первый этап и финальный этап. Первый этап затяжки начинается с момента завершения затяжки и заканчивается достижением первого целевого уровня крутящего момента. Во время первой затяжки отслеживаются время, крутящий момент и угол. Финальный этап затяжки начинается с первого крутящего момента и заканчивается достижением конечного целевого уровня. Во время финальной затяжки отслеживаются время, крутящий момент и угол. Целевое значение для этапа — это достижение либо целевого крутящего момента , либо целевого угла .

Графическое представление используется в документации для описания настройки конфигурации и интерпретации значений параметров. Графики не используются ни в одном графическом интерфейсе.

Четырехэтапная затяжка - параметры на последнем этапе затяжки

А Начало заключительного этапа затяжки

Б Минимальный угол (монитор); Измеряется от выбираемой контрольной точки

С Максимальный угол (монитор); Измеряется от выбираемой контрольной точки

Д Максимальный уровень крутящего момента (монитор)

Э Конечная цель — это либо целевой крутящий момент , либо целевой угол ; точка отсчета угла измеряется от выбираемой точки отсчета.

Ф Кривая скорости и значение скорости

Г Максимальное время (монитор)

ЧАС Минимальное время (монитор)

Дж. Кривая крутящего момента и контрольная точка крутящего момента конечного угла

К Минимальный крутящий момент (монитор)

Л Конец шага

Параметры различаются между целевым крутящим моментом и выбором целевого угла .

Параметры, если конечная цель = крутящий момент

Параметр Описание Значение по умолчанию

Цель Раскрывающийся список выбора конечной цели.

Крутящий момент: Конечной целью на этапе затяжки является значение крутящего момента.

Угол: Конечной целью на этапе затягивания является значение угла.

Скорость цели Переключатель с ручным или автоматическим положением.

Авто

Если переключатель находится в положении «Авто» , то скорость устанавливается автоматически по алгоритму затяжки.

Если переключатель находится в положении «Ручной» , то скорость устанавливается вручную.

Целевая скорость (параметр) Этот параметр виден только при выборе ручной настройки скорости.

Скорость вращения шпинделя во время шага. Выражается числовым значением в об/мин.

Целевой крутящий момент Определяет целевой крутящий момент для шага.

Конец шага определяется в этой точке, когда достигается цель.

Пределы крутящего момента Переключатель с ручным или автоматическим положением.

Авто

Переключатель виден только в том случае, если конечное целевое значение установлено на «Крутящий момент».

Если переключатель находится в положении «Авто» , ограничения крутящего момента устанавливаются автоматически алгоритмом затяжки.

Если переключатель находится в положении «Ручной» , максимальный и минимальный пределы крутящего момента устанавливаются вручную.

Крутящий момент мин. Параметр виден только в том случае, если выбраны ручные ограничения крутящего момента.

Конечный целевой крутящий момент - 5%

Минимальное значение крутящего момента на этапе. Выражается числовым значением крутящего момента.

Максимальный крутящий момент

Параметр виден только в том случае, если выбраны ручные ограничения крутящего момента.

Конечный целевой крутящий момент + 20%

Максимальное значение крутящего момента во время шага. Выражается в числовом значении крутящего момента.

Пределы угла Раскрывающееся меню для выбора точки отсчета для ограничения угла.

От крутящего момента : Контроль угла измеряется от конечной точки крутящего момента контроля угла , которая должна быть выше первого значения крутящего момента и ниже конечного целевого крутящего момента.

Крутящий момент для контроля конечного угла

Заданное значение крутящего момента. С этого момента начинается мониторинг угла. Значение должно быть выше значения первого крутящего момента и ниже значения конечного целевого крутящего момента.

Конечный угол мин. Минимальное вращение шпинделя для шага. Опорная точка для измерения выбирается из выпадающего меню Пределы угла . Это выражается числовым значением градуса.

324 градуса

Параметр Описание Значение по умолчанию

Конечный угол макс. Максимальное вращение шпинделя для шага. Опорная точка для измерения выбирается из выпадающего меню Пределы угла . Это выражается в числовом значении градуса.

396 градусов

Время мин. Minimum time for the step. Measured from the start of the step. This is expressed in a numeric millisecond value. 10 ms

Time max Maximum time for the step. Measured from the start of the step. This is expressed in a numeric millisecond value. 1000 ms

Measure torque at Max torque value

Max torque value

Value at peak angle

Value at shutoff

Measure angle to Value at peak torque

Max angle value

Max angle value

Value at shutoff

The values specified in the table below assumes that the first step of the tightening step is switched on.

Parameters if Final target = angle

Default value

Parameter Description

Target Torque: The final target in the tightening step is a torque value.

Angle: The final target in the tightening step is an angle value.

Target speed If in Auto position, the speed is set automatically by the tightening algorithm.

Auto

If in Manual position, the speed is set manually.

Target speed (parameter)

This parameter is only visible when the Manual speed setting is selected.

The spindle rotation speed during the step.

Torque min The parameter is only visible if Manual torque limits have been selected.

Minimum torque value during the step. Must be above First target torque.

Torque max The parameter is only visible if Manual torque limits have been selected.

Maximum torque value during the step.

Min torque at final supervision

The value is used to monitor and to ensure that a minimum torque level is maintained during the entire final step. The level is normally set below the final torque minimum but higher than the rundown torque level. It can be used to verify that the screw is not broken during the tightening.

18 Nm

Target angle Defines the target angle for the step.

360 degrees

The reference point for the target angle is measured from the end of the previous activated step or step.

End of step is defined at this point, when the target has been reached.

Angle limits Drop-down menu to select the reference point for angle limits.

Manual

Auto. Sets a window of plus/minus 10% of the final target value.

Manual. Allows manual setting of maximum and minimum values. Sets a window of plus/minus 10% of the final target value as default value.

A specified torque value. From this point the angle monitoring starts. The reference point depends on previous activated steps or steps.

Final angle monitoring torque

Angle min Minimum spindle rotation for the step. Reference point for the measurement is selected from the drop-down menu Angle limits. This is expressed in a numeric degree value.

324 degrees

Angle max Maximum spindle rotation for the step. Reference point for the measurement is selected from the drop-down menu Angle limits. 396 degrees

Time min Minimum time for the step. Measured from the start of the step. 10 ms

Time max Maximum time for the step. Measured from the start of the step. 1000 ms

Measure torque at Max torque value

Max torque value

Value at peak angle

Value at shutoff

Measure angle to Value at peak torque

Max angle value

Max angle value

Value at shutoff

NOK on trigger lost On

On

Off

Parameters for Four Step Tightening - Stop Stage

Soft-stop is used to finish the stop step in an ergonomic way.

Default value

Parameter Description

Off

Soft-stop Drop-down menu with On or Off selection.

If soft stop is set to Off, the tool will stop fast as possible after the final target has been reached.

If the tools speed is reduced as fast as possible, it can cause a reaction force. A reaction force can corrupt an angle measurement, which in turn can be compensated with a True-angle compensation.

If soft stop is set to On, the tool will finish the stop step in an ergonomic way.

STwrench

The STwrench is connected to a controller using a wireless connection and is configured through the controller GUI or the web GUI.

The STwrench is configured under the tightening menu in the same way as the other tightening strategies.

The STwrench has a Rapid Backup Unit (RBU). The RBU defines the wrench function and stores the tightening programs. The controller supports currently only the RBU of the type Production.

The STwrench End-fitting tool (socket) contains a RFID TAG with a programmable number. This wrench uses this number to automatically recognize the tool and which program that can be used. The RFID TAG also stores the torque and angle correction coefficients.

The STwrench has several programs both for production tightening and for quality control.

The STwrench can only support tightening programs supported by the tool (Wrench Production and Wrench Quality).

For more information about the STwrench, see the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

STwrench Start Step Parameters

The parameters shown in the tables are available if one of the STwrench strategies are used. There are several combinations of strategies. Some of the parameters are only available for certain strategies and may not be visible in other strategies.

Parameter rules are automatically checked. If a violation occurs, the error indicator

is displayed beside the incorrect parameters. Select the error indicator to display more information about the error.

Switching between strategies can result in the error indicator being shown. This indicates that the chosen combination is invalid, and needs to be corrected.

For more information about the STwrench, see the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

Parameters in the STwrench start step

Default value

Parameter name Condition Description

Tag number On: after enabling TAG Check switch (Configurations > Tool Configuration > TAG Check > On), a correct TAG number is required to run the tightening program.

Off

Off: The TAG number is not checked.

Default value

Parameter name Condition Description

Required tag number Tag number = On

The required TAG number for this tightening program. 1

Off

Rehit detection The parameter options are:

Complete or Off .

Torque correction coefficient

In certain cases extensions may be needed to fit the application. In this case the wrench measurement must be compensated to show a correct value.

1.0

For more information about to calculate the correction coefficient, see the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

The parameter is stored in the RFID TAG in the End-fitting tool.

0°

Angle correction In certain cases extensions may be needed to fit the application. In this case the wrench measurement must be compensated to show a correct value.

To calculate the correction coefficient, please refer to the STwrench user guide.

The parameter is stored in the RFID TAG in the End-fitting tool.

The correction coefficients alter the STwrench measurement. It may cause an improper reading. Before making any corrections, refer to the latest version of the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

STwrench Rundown Step Parameters

The parameters shown in the tables are available if one of the STwrench strategies are used. There are several combinations of strategies. Some of the parameters are only available for certain strategies and may not be visible in other strategies.

Parameter rules are automatically checked. If a violation occurs, the error indicator

is displayed beside the incorrect parameters. Select the error indicator to display more information about the error.

Switching between strategies can result in the error indicator being shown. This indicates that the chosen combination is invalid, and needs to be corrected.

For more information about the STwrench, see the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

Rundown complete is in the STwrench documentation defined as Cycle start , this is when the tightening step begins.

Parameters in the STwrench rundown step

Parameter name Description Default value

Rundown complete torque Definition of the Rundown complete point Depends on the smarthead minload (usually 5% of nominal torque) in Nm

Ratchet time 5000 ms

STwrench Tightening Step Parameters

The parameters shown in the tables are available if one of the STwrench strategies are used. There are several combinations of strategies. Some of the parameters are only available for certain strategies and may not be visible in other strategies.

Parameter rules are automatically checked. If a violation occurs, the error indicator

is displayed beside the incorrect parameters. Select the error indicator to display more information about the error.

Switching between strategies can result in the error indicator being shown. This indicates that the chosen combination is invalid, and needs to be corrected.

For more information about the STwrench, see the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

Parameters in the STwrench tightening step

Default value

Parameter name Condition Description

Target Select the target from the drop-down menu. The parameter options are:

Torque

Torque, Angle, Torque or Angle.

Target Torque Defines the target torque for tightening step. 0 Nm

Target Angle Target = Angle Defines the target angle for tightening step. 360°

Torque limits Target = Torque Selection made by a switch.

Auto or Manually position.

Torque min Torque limits = Manual Torque value for the lower limit 0 Nm

Torque max Torque limits = Manual Torque value for the upper limit 0 Nm

Angle limits Target = Angle Selected from a drop-down menu. The parameter options are:

Auto or Manually.

Angle values for max and min can be or selected

Angle limits Target = Torque Selected from a drop-down menu. The parameter options are:

Off: No angle limit monitoring.

From rundown complete: The monitoring window is set from when the Rundown complete torque is reached.

From torque: The monitoring window is set from when the specific torque value is reached.

Torque value from when the angle limits are monitored 18.75 Nm

Final angle monitoring torque

Angle min Angle limits = on or manually

Angle value lower limit 324°

Angle max Angle limits = on or manually

Angle value upper limit 396°

Angle search limit Angle limits = manually

Measure torque at Selected from a drop-down menu. The parameter options are:

Max torque value

Value at peak angle

NOK on final less than target Selection made by a switch.

Off

On or Off position.

Change bolt limit 50 Nm

Parameters in the STwrench tightening step if the strategy is Wrench - Production, and PVT compensate with snug

Parameter name Condition Description Default value

Torque compensation point Torque compensation = On 0°

PCT distance Torque compensation = On 360°

PVT interval Torque compensation = On 180°

Delay monitoring Torque compensation = On 0°

Torque min Torque compensation = On Torque value for the lower limit 1 Nm

Torque max Torque compensation = On Torque value for the upper limit 20 Nm

Compensation value Torque compensation = On Selected from a drop-down menu. The parameter options are:

Average torque

Peak torque

STwrench Loosening

The parameters shown in the tables are available if one of the STwrench strategies are used. There are several combinations of strategies. Some of the parameters are only available for certain strategies and may not be visible in other strategies.

Parameter rules are automatically checked. If a violation occurs, the error indicator

is displayed beside the incorrect parameters. Select the error indicator to display more information about the error.

Switching between strategies can result in the error indicator being shown. This indicates that the chosen combination is invalid, and needs to be corrected.

For more information about the STwrench, see the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

Parameters in the STwrench loosening step

Parameter name Condition Description

Default value

Loosening limit

If this parameter is set to a value greater than 0, Power Focus checks if a negative torque exceeding this value is applied during the tightening. In that case, the overall status of the tightening is marked as Not OK. This function is started when the wrench reaches the Cycle Start (before starting the tightening, a loosening is allowed and does not produce results). This function is used to detect unwanted loosening at the end of a tightening (for instance, when the wrench is disengaged from the joint).

0 Nm

STwrench Stop Step Parameters

The parameters shown in the tables are available if one of the STwrench strategies are used. There are several combinations of strategies. Some of the parameters are only available for certain strategies and may not be visible in other strategies.

Parameter rules are automatically checked. If a violation occurs, the error indicator

is displayed beside the incorrect parameters. Select the error indicator to display more information about the error.

Switching between strategies can result in the error indicator being shown. This indicates that the chosen combination is invalid, and needs to be corrected.

For more information about the STwrench, see the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

Parameters in the STwrench loosening step

Parameter name Condition Description Default value

End cycle time It is applied when torque goes below the cycle start and gets to the third percentage value set on the STwrench LEDs. 100 ms

Pulsing Tool Strategies

The strategy can be selected if the controller software version supports the tightening program. Pulsing tools can achieve a higher torque compared to normal rotating tools.

Pulse Tightening Program

Start

During the start step, the tool rotates in a speed mode without any pulsing.

Parameter name Description

Soft start Enables setting of the tool’s speed, angle and maximum torque to facilitate the bolt entering the thread.

Selected by radio buttons.

Off: Soft start is turned off.

On: Soft start is turned on.

Speed Defines the speed during the soft start.

Time Defines the Soft start duration.

Angle Defines the target angle to turn the spindle for the bolt to enter the thread.

Torque max Defines the upper torque limit during the soft start. If Torque max is exceeded, the tightening is considered NOK.

Early: Terminates the tightening immediately when an already tightened screw/bolt is detected. The tightening will be considered as NOK. Requires that Soft start is activated.

Rehit detection

Complete: Even though an already tightened screw/bolt is detected, the tightening is not terminated until all tightening steps have been executed. The tightening will be considered as NOK. To make a rehit detection when Soft start is not activated, the Rehit detection Complete option must be selected. Rehit detection Complete will not terminate the tightening until all tightening steps have been executed. The tightening will be considered a rehit if the speed fails to reach half the rundown speed, a rehit error is then indicated.

Off: No rehit detection will be performed.

Combination Soft start = Off and Rehit = Early is not allowed.

Positive The TrueAngle compensation can detect tool rotation and make angle compensations within the set limits.

Negative The TrueAngle compensation can detect tool rotation and make angle compensations within the set limits.

Use attachment tuning

Attachment tuning is selected by radio buttons.

Gear ratio Socket rotation speed = Tool speed / gear ratio.

Efficiency tuning

For example 0.9 means 10% efficiency loss.

Rundown

During rundown, the tool can use either speed mode, with a constant motor speed, or pulse mode. The selection is made depending on the encountered torque and the given torque limits within the configuration.

Parameter name Description

High-speed rundown The rundown step can be done in high-speed in order to minimize the time, without overshooting. This is achieved by letting the tool run at a higher speed for a specified angle length. When the angle has been reached, the speed will change to the lower speed specified in Rundown speed parameter. Only available for SRB tools.

Length: Default 3600°, max 99999°

Speed: Tool max speed must be higher than Rundown speed (rpm).

Rundown speed Rundown speed can be set to either Max or Manual.

If Rundown speed is set to Manual; enter the tool speed in rpm.

Rundown angle limits Off: Rundown angle limits is turned off.

From Trigger: Rundown angle limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the tightening angle as soon as the tool trigger is pressed and reports if angle limits are violated.

From torque: Rundown angle limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the tightening angle from the specified torque value and reports if angle limits are violated.

Rundown angle monitoring torque

Torque value from where Rundown angle limits are set.

Angle min Angle value for lower angle limit from starting point.

Angle max Angle value for upper angle limit from starting point.

Time min Minimum time for the step.

Time max Maximum time for the step.

Rundown pulse limits Selected from a shortcut menu:

Off: Rundown pulse limits is turned off.

From Trigger: Rundown pulse limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the pulses as soon as the tool trigger is pressed and reports if the pulse limits are violated.

From torque: Rundown pulse limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the pulses from the specified torque value and reports if the pulse limits are violated.

Parameter name Description

Rundown pulse monitoring torque

Torque value from where the Rundown pulse limits monitor starts. The value must be set to a value greater than Continuous max torque.

Pulses min Minimum number of pulses to reach the Rundown complete torque value.

Pulses max Maximum number of pulses to reach the Rundown complete torque value.

Rundown complete torque

Defines the torque value for when snug is reached and the rundown is completed. The program proceeds with the tightening and starts with pulse mode, if not already done so during rundown.

Tightening

Parameter name Description

Target torque Final target torque for the tightening.

Pulse Energy The Pulse energy delivered in the action pulse expressed in a percentage of the maximum energy that the tool can deliver in each pulse.

Reaction force tuning factor The energy delivered by the tool expressed in a percentage value. The reaction force tuning factor is based on the action energy and results in a comfortable reaction.

Residual torque correlation factor

The term Residual torque correlation factor is similar to a calibration and adjusts between the dynamic torque, measured in the electrical tool, and the residual torque, measured by a control tool.

Torque limits Limits can be Automatically or Manually selected.

Torque min Minimum torque for the step.

Torque max Maximum torque for the step.

Angle limits Off:Angle limits is turned off.

From Rundown complete: Angle limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the tightening angle as soon as Rundown complete is reached and reports if angle limits are violated.

From torque: Rundown angle limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the tightening angle from the specified torque value and reports if angle limits are violated.

Rundown angle monitoring torque

Torque value from where Rundown angle limits monitoring starts.

Angle min Angle value for lower angle limit from the starting point.

Angle max Angle value for the upper angle limit from starting point.

Time min Minimum time for the step.

Time max Maximum time for the step.

Pulse limits Off: No pulse limit monitoring.

From rundown complete: The monitoring starts when the Rundown complete torque is reached.

From torque: The monitoring starts when the specific torque value is reached.

Final pulse monitoring torque Torque value from when the pulse limits are monitored.

Pulses min Minimum number of pulses to reach the final target.

Pulses max Maximum number of pulses to reach the final target.

A constant increase in torque is assumed when moving from rundown to tightening. A socket slip off, or a broken screw head can cause the torque to decrease. This may be detected in a monitoring window.

Premature torque loss detection time

Pulse Tightening with Direct Driven Electrical Tools

The principle below is applicable for direct driven electrical tools. It is applicable to the Atlas Copco SRB series of tools.

The pulse tightening uses a technique of pulsing the electrical current in the motor and has two distinct features:

An action current that adds positive torque in the tightening direction.

A reaction current that creates a comfort reaction by applying a reverse torque.

Pulse tightening principle

A Action pulse to apply tightening force.

B Reaction pulse for comfort

The figure shows the general principle of a current pulse tightening strategy. The detailed curve depends on the tool type and the tightening algorithm.

The pulse period consists of two phases as shown in the figure with an action current and a reaction current. Each action pulse adds torque to the tightening until the final target is reached. Each reaction pulse creates a counterforce that provides a comfortable reaction.

The energy level of the action phase and the reaction phase are configurable parameters. The combination of these two parameters creates an efficient tightening combined with operator comfort.

Tightening using the TensorPulse Program

The principle below is applicable for direct driven electrical tool. It is applicable to the Atlas Copco SRB series of tools.

After each pulse period the resulting torque in the screw is increased. After a series of pulses, the final torque target is reached.

TensorPulse with maximum pulse energy

A Maximum positive energy in pulse N

B Maximum positive energy in pulse N+1

C Increase in energy (torque)

The energy level in the action phase and reaction phase are user configurable parameters. The combination of these two parameters creates an efficient tightening combined with operator comfort. It is possible to set the amount of energy in the two phases as a percentage of the maximum energy that can be delivered in each period:

Pulse energy; The amount of energy that is applied to each positive pulse as a percentage of the maximum energy that can be applied in the pulse period. The value is between 10-100%.

Reaction force retention factor; The amount of energy that is applied to each reactive pulse as a percentage of the maximum energy that can be applied in the pulse period. The value is between 0-75%.

TensorPulse with reduced positive pulse energy

A Reduced positive energy in pulse N

B Reduced positive energy in pulse N+1

C Resulting curve for torque build up using maximum pulse energy.

D Resulting curve for torque build up using reduced pulse energy.

A small Pulse energy (reduced energy) requires more pulses to reach the target torque as the torque is increased in smaller steps. Smaller steps provides better accuracy to terminate the tightening when the target is reached. Smaller pulses decrease tool movement and increases operator comfort.

A correctly tuned Reaction force retention factor will create the desired operator comfort. If the factor is too high the operator feels a clockwise rotation of the tool. If the factor is too low, the operator feels a counter clockwise rotation of the tool.

In an ideal configuration, the reaction energy does not create any loosening force. If the amount of pulses to reach the target value increases, the value is set too high and a small loosening occurs at each pulse.

The optimum values for the Pulse energy and the Reaction force retention factor need to be tuned for optimum performance of the tool and for best operator comfort.

Impulse Single Step Tightening Program

Rundown

Default value

Parameter name Condition Description

Rundown speed Selected by radio buttons.

Max

Rundown speed can be selected between Max or Manual.

Rundown speed Rundown speed = manual Specifies the tool speed during the rundown step.

Off

Rundown time limits Selected from a shortcut menu:

Off:Rundown time limits is turned off.

From Trigger: Rundown time limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the time as soon as the tool trigger is pressed and reports if the time limits are violated.

From torque: Rundown time limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the time from the specified torque value and reports if the time limits are violated.

Rundown time limits = from torque

Rundown time monitoring torque

Torque value from where Rundown time limits monitor starts.

Time min Rundown time limits = On Minimum allowed time for rundown. 10ms

Time max Rundown time limits = On Maximum allowed time for rundown. 5000ms

Off

Rundown pulse limits Selected from a shortcut menu:

Off:Rundown pulse limits is turned off.

From Trigger: Rundown pulse limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the pulses as soon as the tool trigger is pressed and reports if the pulse limits are violated.

From torque: Rundown pulse limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the pulses from the specified torque value and reports if the pulse limits are violated.

Rundown pulse limits = from torque

Rundown pulse monitoring torque

Torque value from where the Rundown pulse limits monitor starts. 2.5Nm

Pulses min Rundown pulse limits = On Minimum number of pulses to reach the target. 2

Pulses max Rundown pulse limits = On Maximum number of pulses to reach the target. 50

Defines the torque value for when snug is reached and rundown is completed. 5Nm

Rundown complete torque

Tightening

Default value

Parameter name Condition Description

Target torque Final target torque for the tightening.

Pulse Energy The Pulse energy delivered in the action pulse expressed in a percentage of the maximum energy the tool can deliver in each pulse.

100%

Residual torque correlation factor

The term Residual torque correlation factor is similar to a calibration and adjusts between the dynamic torque, measured in the electrical tool, and the residual torque, measured by a control tool.

Torque limits Selected by radio buttons.

Limits can be Automatically or Manually selected

Torque min Torque limits = manual

Minimum torque for the step.

Torque max Torque limits = manual

Maximum torque for the step.

Off

Time limits Selected from a shortcut menu:

Off:Time limits is turned off.

From rundown complete: Time limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the time as soon as rundown complete is reached and reports if the time limits are violated.

From torque: Time limits is turned On. The system starts to monitor the time from the specified torque value and reports if the time limits are violated.

Time monitoring torque Time limits = from torque

Torque value from where the Time limits monitor starts.

Time min Time limits = On Minimum allowed time for tightening. 10ms

Time max Time limits = On Maximum allowed time for tightening. 1000ms

Off

Pulse limits Selected from a shortcut menu:

Off: No pulse limit monitoring.

From rundown complete: The monitoring starts when the Rundown complete torque is reached and reports if the number of pulses is outside the limit.

From torque: The monitoring starts when the specific torque value is reached and reports if the number of pulses is outside the limit.

Pulse limits = from torque

Final pulse monitoring torque

Torque value from when the pulse limits are monitored.

Pulses min Pulse limits = on Minimum number of pulses to reach the final target. 2

Pulses max Pulse limits = on Maximum number of pulses to reach the final target. 50

Premature torque loss detection time

A constant increase in torque is assumed when moving from rundown to tightening. A socket slip of, or a broken screw head can cause the torque decrease. This may be detected in a monitoring window.

200 ms

Rotate

The Rotate strategy is primarily a strategy for testing and demonstration purposes. When the tool is allowed to rotate freely, it turns the socket the specified angle using the lowest torque possible.

Parameter Description Default value

Target speed Target speed for the Rotate strategy.

Manual tool speed during the Rotate strategy. 16.5% of Tool max speed

Target angle Angle to turn the spindle. 360°

External Result

External result is a strategy used when an OK tightening is indicated by an external digital signal (and not by torque or angle values measured during tightening).

When the signal is sent, the Result view will show the value of the Target parameter provided in the tightening program (specified torque value, angle value, or text string). These (torque and angle) values do not represent actual measured values, but only inserted text.

Parameter Description Default value

Torque Numerical value for desired displayed target torque value 0.00

Angle Numerical value for desired displayed target angle value 360°

Text Alphanumerical string for desired displayed text.

Running the External Result Tightening Strategy with a Tool Connected

1. On the Home view, select the Tightening Tab. Then, create a tightening program with External Result strategy.

1. Return to the Home view and select the Virtual Station Tab.

In the Licenses window, the External Result Tightening Strategy with a Tool Connected feature requires a license to be assigned and used by a virtual station.

1. In the Tool window, select the necessary tool. Then, select the tool configuration.

1. In the Task window, select the tightening program with an External Result strategy.

1. Send EXTERNAL_OK signal to the Virtual Station.

1. Select Go Result button to display the results.

Results are sent from the Tool configuration for the tool connected to the Virtual Station.

Running the External Result Tightening Strategy without a Tool Connected

1. On the Home view, select the Tightening Tab. Then, create a tightening program with External Result strategy.

1. Return to the Home view and select the Settings Tab. Then, select External Tool.

1. Select the Plus icon at the upper-right corner of the GUI to create an external tool.

It is possible to create up to 10 External Tools configurations.

1. In the External Tool window, enter the model, the serial number and the description of the external tool.

Serial Number is a mandatory text box. The serial number can be used to provide an identifier for the necessary tool, for example the manufacturer serial number. The maximum number of characters for the Serial Number text box is 32.

Once the switch at the upper-right corner of the External Tool window is set to On, return to the Home view and select the Tool Tab. The added external tool appears in the list of the available tools.

1. Return to the Home view and select the Virtual Station Tab.

In the Licenses window, the External Result Tightening Strategy without a Tool Connected feature requires a license to be assigned and used by a virtual station.

1. In the Tool window, select the necessary external tool. Then, select the tool configuration.

1. In the Task window, select the tightening program with an External Result strategy.

1. Send EXTERNAL_OK signal to the Virtual Station.

1. Select Go Result button to display the results (serial numbers).

Serial numbers are sent from the External Tool configuration for the tool connected to the Virtual Station.

Tightening Program and Error Reporting Validation

The tightening program automatically validates with the parameter rules and tool properties as soon as new values are entered or changes are made. If the validation detects any errors they are reported with an error description.

Validation Error Reporting

If the validation gives an error, it is displayed with an icon next to the parameter or parameters causing the error. When you tap on the icon, a short description of the error is given.

Example (See image):

1. Target torque is set to 25 Nm with Final torque limits set to Torque min 23.75 Nm and Torque max 24.5 Nm (this value is hidden by the pop-up window in the

image).

1. When you tap on the validation error icon next to the Torque max parameter, a short description of the error is given, saying that Target torque is greater than

Torque max (Torque max <= Target torque).

1. To fix the error, adjust the Torque max value so that it is greater than Target torque, and the error icon will disappear.

Validate a Tool with a Tightening Program

1. In the Tightening menu, choose Tightening program library or Multistep program library. If required, select a specific program

1. Select the tool icon

in the upper right corner.

1. In the pop-up window, choose the tool to validate the tightening program against, and click Validate.

If a tightening program is not compatible with the selected tool, it will be indicated by a red circle with an exclamation point.

Tightening Program Tool Compatibility Table

The availability of tightening strategies depends on the licenses installed on the controller.

SRB 2.0 SRB 2.1

SL

Tightening Strategies ES ST STR SR SB+ ETT

SRB-HA TBP / TBP-S STW External tool

QST STB

(low voltage) ETP-SRB31-20 ETP-SRB31-25

Two step X X X X X X X X X X - X - - -

Quick step X X X X X X X X X X X X - - -

Three step X X X X X X X X X X - X - - -

Four step X X X X - X X X - - - - - - -

Turbo Tight X - X X* - X - - - X X - - - -

Rotate X X X X X X X X X X - X - - -

External Result X X X X X X X X X X X X X - X

Tensor Pulse - - - - - - - - - X X - - - -

Impulse - single step - - - - - - - - - - - - X - -

Wrench production - - - - - - - - - - - - - X -

Wrench quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - X -

• Available only for SR31.

SRB 2.0 SRB 2.1

SL

Tightening Features ES ST STR SR SB+ ETT

TBP / TBP-S STW External tool

QST STB

(low voltage) ETP-SRB31-20 ETP-SRB31-25

True Angle - - X - - X - - - - - - - -

Multistep Programs

Risk of injury

A change in the configuration of the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Controller features, such as the Low Reaction Tightening Strategies and controller-wide functions among others, require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the controller. Please refer to Licenses (FMS) for more detailed information on licenses.

A multistep tightening is a tightening done in several steps. The number of steps and the type of steps vary depending on the tightening to be done. A multistep tightening program is highly configurable, including monitoring function and restrictions.

The multistep tightening strategy has not been implemented for STB tools.

Multistep GUI Interface

While multistep tightening programs can be selected from the controller screen, editing programs can only be done in the web GUI.

The interface for mutistep programs can be divided into three main areas.

On top there is a drop-down menu containing the Properties of the multistep tightening program. Here general properties such as program name, overal program monitor and validation can be filled out.

To the right there are three tabs containing the steps, monitors and restrictions that can be used to build the multistep program. To use any of the items, click on the appropriate tab, and drag the item in the list to the tightening area. Depending on its funtion, either drop the item between the beginning and the end of the program (for steps), or on top of a particular step (for monitors and restrictions).

The main area of the interface is made up of the tightening area. This is the area that includes all the steps in the tightening program.

At bottom left of the screen there are zoom buttons (+ and -), as well as a Delete button. Use the zoom buttons to zoom in and out on the tightening area.

Tightening Steps

This section lists the tightening steps that are valid for the Power Focus 6000 and Power Focus 6000 StepSync Controllers.

General Parameters

Name

It is possible to rename each step, if needed.

Rotational direction

Each of the tightening steps can run either forward, that is to make a tightening, or reverse, to loosen the screw slightly. The arrows indicate this direction. Many of the tightening steps have a direction hard-coded to forward, for example Tighten to Angle, or Tighten to Torque. Steps such as Loosen to Angle or Loosen to Torque have their direction automatically set to reverse.

The reverse setting is not allowed for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end. The tightening direction of the tightening program must be the same as the tightening direction of the open end tool for a tightening to be allowed to be run. It is possible to assign a loosening program to a tightening program for an open end tool, but if the direction switch is set to run the loosening program, the tool will be locked.

Step category

For each step, there is an option to choose a step category. By selecting step category, the NOK tightenings will be listed in the event result view with related detailed status together with the corresponding multistep error information. If no selection is made, the detailed status will be set to "uncategorized multistep error". The related detailed status can be customized.

Angle window

A joint is considered Hard if the screw is tightened to its full torque and it rotates 30 degrees (or less) after it has been tightened to its snug point. A Soft joint rotates 720 degrees or more after it has been tightened to its snug point. The hardness parameter defines the Angle Window for the gradient calculation. The harder the joint - the smaller the angle window.

Speed Ramp / Acceleration (only available in ToolsTalk 2)

For most of the steps it is possible to specify how the acceleration to the target speed should be achieved. Three different settings are possible; Hard, Soft and Manual. The acceleration defined will be used whenever a step is started. Regardless whether the tool is already running with speed at the beginning of the step, the ramp will be used to accelerate to the target speed of the step. This will be the case even if the speed at the start of the step is higher, or lower than the target speed.

Speed ramp - Hard and Soft mode:

Acceleration Speed ramp used

Hard 2000 rpm/s (Speed Ramp between 1000 and 10000 rpm/s is a Hard acceleration.)

Soft 500 rpm/s (Speed Ramp between 200 and 1000 rpm/s is a Soft acceleration.)

Speed ramp - Manual mode:

Parameter Default value Minimum limit Maximum limit

Speed 60 rpm Must be > 0 Must be <= Tool Max Speed

Acceleration 500 rpm/s Must be > 0 Must be <= Tool Max Acceleration

Using speed shifts

You can define 1-5 angle triggers or torque triggers during a step, where the speed will shift.

The speed shifts can be added in the Configuration field.

Within one step, all the speed shift triggers are based on the same property (either torque or angle). They cannot be mixed within one step.

To add a speed shift:

1. In the dialog box of a step that can have speed shifts, select Add speed shift. Then, select an angle range or a torque range.

The Speed Shift Angle/Torque fields open.

1. Add values according to the table below:

Parameter Description

Speed Must be >0

Speed ramp type Hard or soft

The Torque triggers and Angle triggers must be less than the step target, depending on the type of the step and the trigger type.

The Torque trigger and Torque speed also validate against the Max torque and Max speed of the tool. A warning or error indicator occurs whenever the Speed Shift settings exceed either the tool max values or step max values.

Controlling braking behavior (Ergo stop/Inertia)

The braking behavior of a Multistep tightening program can be controlled at two possible locations in the program: in a step preceding a reversal of direction of the tightening, and/or at the final step of the tightening program. At other locations in the Multistep program, the braking parameters will not be available in the step's general settings. Braking can be set to either Ergo stop or Inertia. Inertia will brake the tool completely, while Ergo stop will allow for a more ergonomic slowing down of the tightening.

To set the type of braking, go into the settings for the step, and set the Brake configuration dropdown to Ergo stop or Inertia. Inertia has no additional parameters.

Ergo stop parameters

Parameter Description

Adaptive brake Set the Adaptive Brake to On or Off

Ramp time Only available when Adaptive Brake is set to Off. Insert time in ms.

List of individual steps

The following tightening steps are not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end:

A - Loosen to Angle

TrR - Loosen to Trigger Release

T - Loosen to Torque

E - Engage

SR - Socket Release

DT - Tighten to DynaTork

C - Clutch

This step will run the tool with the programmed Speed in forward direction until the Clutch has been released. When the tool has reported the release of the Clutch the step will finish with OK status.

A tightening program using the Clutch step cannot have any other step assigned.

This step is only valid for the Clutch tools BCV-RE and BCP-RE.

Parameter Description

Speed Control One Speed or Two Speed

Final Speed Sets the final speed of the program [rpm]

Speed Ramp Switch where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft]

Rehit Rehit detection set to On or Off

Rehit angle Sets the rehit angle [°]

CL - Clutch Loosening

This step will run the tool with the programmed speed in reverse direction until the tool trigger is released.

A loosening program using the Clutch step can't have any other step assigned.

This step is only valid for the Clutch tools BCV-RE and BCP-RE.

Parameter Description

Final Sets the speed of the program [rpm]

W – Wait

In this step the tool waits the specified amount of time. The tool does not rotate while waiting.

The tool waits the specified time. If the hold position is set to On the tool holds the position during the Wait time.

SR - Socket Release

This step runs the tool with speed n in the backward direction until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

This step is only allowed to use as the last step in the tightening path of a multistep tightening program. However, it is possible to add a sync point after this step.

Parameter Description

Target angle The angle target.

Default: 3º , must be > 0

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed Default: 60 rpm.

DI – Run Until Digital Input

This steps runs the tool, in the direction defined by parameter Direction, until the input specified by Digital Input goes high or low depending on the value of Stop Condition.

This step is not available for STB tools.

Parameter Description

Direction Forward, or Backward

Parameter Description

Digital Input One of the following local digital inputs on the controller can be selected:

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

Stop Condition Falling edge: The steps runs until a falling edge is detected after step start.

Rising edge: The steps runs until a rising edge is detected after step start.

Any edge: The step runs until a falling or a rising edge is detected after step start.

Low: The step runs until low value is detected.

High: The step runs until high value is detected.

Speed (rpm) Default: 60 rpm.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp Available if Speed ramp type is Manual. Default: 500 rpm/s.

A – Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle

A – Tighten to Angle

This step runs the tool until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

A – Loosen to Angle

This step runs the tool with the speed n in the backward direction until the angle target is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

Parameters

Parameter Description

Target angle The angle target. Must be > 0.

Speed Default: 60 rpm.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

TrR – Loosen to Trigger Release

This step is valid only for the PF6000 controller.

This step runs in the backward direction until the tool trigger is released (loosen). It can only be used as a last step in a program.

For STB tools, this step is only applicable for loosening programs.

Parameter Description

Speed Numerical value for rotation speed; in rpm.

Speed Ramp Type List of options where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft, Manual]

TTTR – Tighten to Trigger Release

This step runs until the tool trigger is released (tighten). It can only be used as a last step in a tightening program.

Parameter Description

Speed Numerical value for rotation speed; in rpm.

Speed Ramp Type List of options where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft, Manual]

Tighten to yield, method 2 (YM2)

This step is valid only for the PF6 Stepsync controller and not valid for PF6000 controller.

This step runs the tool with the specified speed in the forward direction until the yield point is detected.

Search for the yield point starts when the torque has reached Tt. The average of the torque over Af degrees is calculated. This procedure is repeated N rs times.

A reference slope is calculated with linear regression over the N rs points. After that, new average values are continuously calculated over A f degrees.

The actual slope is calculated with linear regression over the last N s average points. The yield point is reached when the slope is less than Py % of the reference slope.

Parameter Description

Target torque Must be > 0.

Filter angle Default: 1. Must be > 0.

Number of samples Default: 6. Must be >=4.

Number pf samples, reference Default: 6. Must be >=4.

Yield point percentage Default: 90%. Must be >20%.

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

T - Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque

T – Tighten to Torque

This step runs the tool with the programmed speed in forward direction until the target torque is reached.

Parameter Description

Target torque The torque target. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

T – Loosen to Torque

This step runs the tool with the speed in the backward direction. For the step to be active, the torque must first exceed 110 % of the Target torque. The Target torque should be set to a positive value. After reaching the target torque, the step runs until the torque drops below the target torque.

Parameter Description

Target torque The torque target. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

T+A – Tighten to Torque Plus Angle

This step runs the tool until the target torque is reached. From this point it continues to run an additional target angle.

Parameter Description

Target torque The torque target. Must be > 0.

Target angle The angle target. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed Default: 60 rpm.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

T|A – Tighten to Torque or Angle

This step runs the tool with the speed n in the forward direction until the first of either torque target or angle target is reached. The torque and angle measurements start at the beginning of the step.

Parameter Description

Target torque Must be > 0.

Target angle Must be > 0.

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

T&A – Tighten to Torque and Angle

The tool runs until with the specified speed in the forward direction until both target torque and target angle are reached. The target torque and the target angle must be set to > 0.

Parameter Description

Target torque Must be > 0.

Target angle Default: 0. Must be > 0.

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

DT – Tighten to DynaTork

This step runs the tool with speed n in the forward direction until the Target torque is reached. The tool will then hold the current constant at the DynaTork Percentage of Target torque during the DynaTork time.

To avoid overheating of the tool, it is strongly recommended to never run DynaTork to more than 40% of the maximum torque of the tool.

Parameter Description

Target torque The torque target. Must be > 0.

DynaTork Time The time DynaTork will be active.

DynaTork Percentage The percentage of Torque target.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed (rpm) Default: 60 rpm.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

Y – Tighten to Yield

This step is not available for STB tools.

This strategy runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction until the yield point is detected. The yield point is found by monitoring the torque gradient from the point where the torque goes above the Trigger Torque level, calculated based on Torque and Angle distance measurements. The Angle distance parameter is set according to the specified hardness of the joint.

Set the Gradient angle window (for hard joint, for soft joint or for manually setting of the Angle window). If Manual is selected, the Angle Window must be set. A joint is considered Hard if the screw is tightened to its full torque and it rotates 30 degrees or less after it has been tightened to its snug point. A Soft joint rotates 720 degrees or more after it has been tightened to its snug point. The hardness parameter defines the Angle Window for the gradient calculation. The harder the joint - the smaller the angle window.

Parameter Description

Gradient Angle Window Specifies Angle Window:

For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg.

For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg.

Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Trigger Torque The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be >= 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Yield Point Percentage Must be >= 20 %

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Torque Filter Type The type of the filter:

None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

20 Hz

40 Hz

90 Hz

200 Hz

600 Hz

Number of Samples Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

ThCT – Thread Cutting to Torque

The Thread Cutting to Torque function enables tightening where the Rundown torque required is greater than the Rundown complete torque, for example when tightening thin layers of metal using self-threading (or selftapping) screws. The tool runs in forward direction until the Thread Cutting Angle (Aw) is reached. The thread cutting angle window is measured from when the torque passes Thread Cut Trigger Torque (Ttc) for the first time. From the point where Thread cutting angle is reached, the step continues to run until the Target Torque (Tt) is reached.

Parameter Description

Target torque Must be > 0.

Thread Cutting Angle Window Default: 0. Must be > 0.

Trigger Torque The angle measurement starts at this trigger.

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

RD – Rundown

This step is not available for STB tools.

Rundown step is the part of the tightening from when the screw enters the thread until just before the screw head touches the underlying surface and snug point is reached. The torque required during rundown does not contribute to any clamping force.

This step runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction, and depending on the Rundown Type, Torque or Snug the step behavior is as follows:

Rundown Type: To Torque: The step stops when the specified target torque is found.

Rundown Type: To Snug: The snug gradient calculation starts at the specified torque trigger level Tt. If no torque trigger is set the gradient calculation is started at the start of the step.

The slope calculation is made between two angle points A degrees apart and is calculated as: (Tn – Tn-1) / (An – An-1) and as soon as two slopes after each other are larger than TSLOPE the snug point is found.

d

Parameter Description

Rundown type To Torque or To Snug.

Target torque Default: "not set". Must be > 0.

Speed Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Trigger Torque If Rundown type is To Snug, the Trigger torque field is displayed.

Default: "not set". Must be > 0.

Delta Angle If Rundown type is To Snug, the Delta angle field is displayed.

Default: "0". Must be > 0.

Torque Rate If Rundown type is To Snug, the Torque rate field is displayed.

Default: "0". Must be > 0.

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

Brake

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

E - Engage

This step is not available for STB tools.

This step runs the tool in both directions until the socket engages the screw. The step continues until Target torque or Target angle is reached, provided that Continue if not Engaged is set to Yes. If Target Angle is reached in any direction, the direction is reversed. Limit the search iterations by entering Max Engage Attempts. If Target Torque is reached in any direction the step will finish with OK status.

Ext - External Result

External result is a strategy used when an OK tightening is indicated by an external digital signal (and not by torque or angle values measured during tightening). This external signal can be provided through any means that can provide a digital signal into the Power Focus 6000 (e.g through the I/O bus).

When the signal is sent, the result view (logged data) will show the value of the Target parameter provided in the tightening program (specified torque value, angle value, or text string). These (torque and angle) values do not represent actual measured values, but only inserted text.

Parameter Description

Torque Numerical value for desired displayed target torque value. A signal could for example come from a Click Wrench and display .

Angle Numerical value for desired displayed target angle value. A signal could for example come from a Click Wrench and display .

Text Alphanumerical string for desired displayed text. For example: "Oil has been changed".

MWR - Mechatronic Wrench

Mechatronic Wrench is a specialized step that can be used only in conjunction with the Mechatronic Wrench (MWR).

This step cannot be used in combination with other steps. No restrictions can be used with this step. By default, the step has three monitors: Peak Torque, Angle, and Click.

Parameter Description

Loosening limit Numerical value for negative torque (i.e. torque in the loosening direction) at which point the tightening result is marked as NOK (False direction of tightening (loosen)); in Nm.

Tool Size Numerical value for the specific length of the end fitting tool installed on the MWR-TA; in mm.

Tool Bend Numerical value for the end fitting tool installed on the MWR-TA; in °/Nm.

Numerical value for the angle for determining if the screw was already tightened if the torque is reached; in °.

Rehit Angle Window

Max Angular Rate Numerical value for the max rate at which the screw can be tightened; in °/s.

WP - Wrench Production

Strategy used for the quality test of the tightening performed with an STwrench.

Parameter Description

The Wrench Production step type can be configured with the following control strategies.

Control Strategy

Torque: This strategy guides the operator is reaching the desired target torque.

Angle: This strategy guides the operator is reaching the desired target angle.

Torque or Angle: This strategy guides the operator is reaching the desired target angle or desired target torque.

Torque and Angle: This strategy guides the operator in tightening a bolt until both the target torque and angle have been reached.

Yield Point: With this strategy, the STWrench detects the yield point automatically. The torque limits specify the range in which the result is OK. Target angle specifies how far beyond the yield point the user may tighten.

Loose: This strategy is used to loosen a tightened screw.

PVT compensate with snug: This strategy guides the operator in reaching the desired target torque for joints with prevailing torque, when the prevailing torque level is higher than the final target.

Based on the control strategy selected, a combination of some of the parameters listed below will be displayed.

Parameters Description

Target Torque Defines the target torque for tightening step.

Measure torque at Specifies where the torque will be measured.

Choose between Peak torque or Peak angle.

Peak torque: The torque value will be set to the peak torque value.

Peak Angle : The torque value will be set to the torque measured at the peak angle.

Angle search limit This is an offset that is used to the set the torque result value for a tightening. Measure torque at must be set to Peak Angle for this parameter to be available.

Ratchet time Numerical value for ratchet time which is by default 5000 ms. This allows the operator to release the torque for a while and recharge during the tightening operation.

If the Ratchet time is exceeded the result of the tightening is marked as NOK with the reason "Tightening timeout".

End cycle time Numerical value in ms to indicate the end cycle time. Applied when torque goes below the rundown complete

Torque correction coefficient

Angle correction The parameter is used to correct the angle reading when using an extension or torque multiplier on the wrench. Default value is 0.

Target Angle Defines the target angle for tightening step.

Rehit detection On or Off. Rehit detection can be used to determine when a tightening is a rehit based on the angle limit setting. Angle limit for rehit is enabled if Rehit direction is set to On.

Linear slope coefficient Linear slope coefficient characterizes the joint stiffness in the linear part of the curve, as torque/angle slope in the Nm/Deg measurement unit.

Compensate value Choose between Average torque and Peak torque. The Compensate value specifies how the PVT will be calculated.

Average torque - The PVT will be based on an average calculated using the following:

Delay monitoring

PVT interval

PVT distance

Prevailing torque min

Prevailing torque max

Peak torque - The PVT will be based on the peak value measured before snug was detected.

Delay monitoring PVT calculation will not start before this window has been passed, starts at tightening start.

PVT interval Sets how many degrees the PVT window shall be calculated for, start from the PVT distance point.

PVT distance Sets how many degrees prior to snug the system shall start the PVT window.

Prevailing torque min Prevailing torque minimum limit.

Prevailing torque max Prevailing torque maximum limit

WQ - Wrench Quality

Strategy used for quality test of tightenings with an STwrench.

Parameter Description

The Wrench Quality strategy can be configured with the following control strategies.

Control Strategy

Residual Torque/Time: This strategy analyzes the torque trace as a function of time. The operator shall execute this operation with a single, steady, movement. The wrench automatically recognizes the breakaway and residual point.

Residual Torque/Angle: This strategy evaluates the residual torque on a joint, looking for the residual point of the Torque/Angle trace.

Residual Torque/Peak: This strategy evaluates the residual torque on a joint as the peak torque necessary to rotate the bolt further.

Loose and Retighten: This strategy loosens a bolt and retightens it back to its original position

Yield Point: With this strategy the wrench detects the yield point automatically. Target Angle specifies how far beyond the yield point the user may tighten.

Based on the control strategy selected, a combination of some of the parameters listed below will be displayed.

Parameters Description

Ratchet time Numerical value for ratchet time which is by default 5000 ms. This allows the operator to release the torque for a while and recharge during the tightening operation.

If the Ratchet time is exceeded the result of the tightening is marked as NOK with the reason "Tightening timeout".

Torque correction coefficient

Angle correction The parameter is used to correct the angle reading when using an extension or torque multiplier on the wrench. Default value is 0.

Target Angle Defines the target angle for tightening step.

Rehit detection On or Off. Rehit detection can be used to determine when a tightening is a rehit based on the angle limit setting. Angle limit for rehit is enabled if Rehit direction is set to On.

Linear slope coefficient Linear slope coefficient characterizes the joint stiffness in the linear part of the curve, as torque/angle slope in the Nm/Deg measurement unit.

Trace Setting

When the trace configuration is enabled on the program level, the trace resolution can be configured on step level. The setting for Trace Setting defines how the sampling should be done on each specific step.

With this trace recording the sample rates are not the same in all the steps, instead the sample rate depends on the configuration in each step. This means the trace is divided into one trace for each step.

Parameter Description

Trace Setting Program: Use the settings as defined on program level.

Manual: The trace sample type from the program level will be used, that is, Time or Angle. Using a different sample rate will override the setting on the program level.

Sample Time Choose the sample time from the drop-down list (0.25 - 1000 ms).

Sample Angle Choose the sample angle from the drop-down list (0.25 - 20 degree).

The maximum number of samples in a trace is 4096. If a tightening produces more than 4096 samples a down-sampling process will take place. A down-sampling process is removing every second trace sample from the whole tightening and continuing recording with half the resolution. This process is repeated every time the 4096 sample limit is reached. Since the down-sampling process is done for all steps, the relation between the steps is the same.

Torque Available for all tools equipped with a torque transducer.

Angle Available for all tools.

Speed Available for all tools.

Torque Second Only available for tools with two torque transducers.

Angle Second Only available for tools with two angle transducers.

Current Available for all tools.

Gradient Available if some step/restriction/monitor produces the gradient values.

Step Monitors

The step monitors are used to verify that the tightening was achieved according to the specification, for example, angle limits or torque. Each step has mandatory step monitors and optional step monitors. The mandatory monitors are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program. The optional monitors are flexible and can be placed as needed in the multistep program. Every step can have up to eight monitors each.

The following monitors are automatically added to every step that is added to the multistep tightening program.

Default step monitors

Step Monitor Applicable steps

Angle All

Peak Torque All

A – Angle

This step monitor measures the maximum angle reached during the monitor and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit. The angle measurement starts at the start of the monitor or, if specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter Description

Type Four angle types are available: Peak angle (default), Angle at peak torque, Shut off angle, and Angle at end.

Trigger torque The angle measurement starts at this trigger.

Low Limit Lowest acceptable angle.

High Limit Highest acceptable angle.

YA – Angle from Yield

This monitor measures the peak angle reached from the yield point and checks that the peak angle is within the limit.

This step monitor is not available for the STB tools.

Parameter Description

Gradient Angle Window Specifies Angle Window:

For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg.

For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg.

Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Yield Point Percentage Must be >= 20 %

Trigger Torque The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Low Limit Lowest acceptable angle. Must be >= 0

High Limit Highest acceptable angle. Must be > 0

Torque Filter Type The type of the filter:

None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

20 Hz

40 Hz

90 Hz

200 Hz

600 Hz

Number of Samples Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

MT – Mean Torque

This monitor measures the average torque during the monitor and checks the calculated value is within the limits.

This step monitor is not available for the STB tools.

Parameter Description

Type Specifies start condition:

Step Start: The measurement starts from step start and ends at the shut-off point.

Torque Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where the torque passes Torque Trigger for the first time. It ends at the shut-off point.

Angle Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where the angle is Angle Trigger, measured from the optional Trigger Torque, is reached. Without Trigger Torque, the Angle Trigger is measured from the start of the step. It ends at the shut-off point

Angle Window: Measures during an Angle Window. The window starts at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time plus an angle offset, Angle Trigger.

Time Interval: Measures during the last Time Interval seconds of the tightening.

Available when Type is set to Trigger Torque, Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be >= 0 and < Tool Max Torque.

Torque Trigger

Available when Type is set to Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be > 0.

Angle Trigger

Available when Type is set to Angle Window. Must be > 0.

Angle Window

Available when Type is set to Time Interval. Must be > 0.

Time Interval

Low Limit Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit Highest acceptable torque.

PT – Peak Torque

This step monitor measures the maximum torque reached during the monitor, including any over shoot, and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter Description

Low Limit Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit Highest acceptable torque.

PTCA – Post Thread Cut Angle

Measures the angle achieved during the monitoring and checks that it is between the specified angle limits. The Trigger Torque level is ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window is reached. After that, the angle measuring starts as soon as the measured torque is above Trigger Torque. The parameter Stop Condition specifies where the angle measurement should end.

Parameter Description

Thread cutting angle window Must be > 0

Angle measurement type Peak angle

Angle at peak torque

Shut off angle

Angle at end

Thread cut trigger torque Must be >= 0

Must be > Low limit

PTCPT – Post Thread Cut Peak Torque

Measures the maximum torque achieved during the monitoring, including any over-shoot, and checks that it is between the Torque limits. All torque values are ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window has been reached.

Parameter Description

Thread cut trigger torque Must be >= 0

Thread cutting angle window Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

PVTH – Post View Torque High

This monitor checks that all torque values in the Angle Window Length are below the High limit.

The Angle Window starts at the angle degrees set in Start Angle in reverse direction from the shut-off point. This then spans for the angle degrees set in Angle Window Length in reverse direction. If Start Angle is left blank, the Angle Window starts at the shut-off point. The torque values used in the monitor are based on the mean torque value, calculated over Number of Samples. If the total angle of the step is less than Start Angle plus Angle Window Length the monitor will report NOK.

Parameter Description

Number of samples Minimum value =1 Maximum value = 80

High Limit Highest acceptable torque.

PVTL – Post View Torque Low

Same as monitor Post View Torque High, but this monitor checks that all torque values in the Angle Window Length are above Low Limit instead.

Parameter Description

Number of samples Minimum value =1 Maximum value = 80

Low Limit Lowest acceptable torque.

PrT – Prevailing Torque

The monitor calculates the prevailing torque value in the Window Length and checks that it is between the Torque limits. The Angle Window starts at the angle degrees set in Start Angle in reverse direction from the shut-off point. This then spans for the angle degrees set in Angle Window Length in reverse direction. If Start Angle is left blank the angle window starts at the shut-off point. The calculated prevailing torque value is the mean or peak torque value (depending on the parameter set by the user) during the Window Length. The calculated value is saved as result data Prevailing Torque Measured. If Torque compensation is set to On, the Prevailing Torque Measured will be subtracted from all torque result values in consecutive steps. Any previously calculated prevailing torque compensation values will no longer be subtracted from torque result values. If Torque compensation is set to No, no subtraction will be made in consecutive steps.

If the total angle of the step is less than the Start Angle plus Window Length, then the monitor will report NOK.

Prevailing torque can be measured as an average of measured values, or at peak torque. To choose between these two modes, set the Use Value parameter to either Mean torque (for average values), or Peak torque (for peak value).

Parameter Description

Torque Compensation On or off.

Use value Mean torque (for average values), or Peak torque (for peak value).

SOT – Shut Off Torque

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The torque is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter Description

Low Limit Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit Highest acceptable torque.

SOC – Shut Off Current

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The current is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit .

Parameter Description

Low Limit Lowest acceptable current.

High Limit Highest acceptable current.

SSD - Stick Slip Detection

This step monitor detects and reports stick slip effects during a step. The detection is done by counting the number of times the torque falls below the Trigger Level. If the number of times is larger than Maximum Number of Oscillations then the stick slip error is reported. The monitor operates in two different modes, Dynamic or Fixed. The difference between the modes is the way that the Trigger level is calculated.

Dynamic Torque: Trigger Level is dynamically calculated as Peak Torque Percentage of the current max torque, which has been achieved so far during the monitoring. The monitoring is started as soon as the torque passes the Trigger Torque.

Fixed Torque: Trigger Level is the fixed Trigger Torque specified by the user. In this mode the percentage is not needed.

If the torque never reaches the Trigger Torque then the monitoring is not started, this will result in status NOK.

Parameter Description

Type Specifies what type of Stick slip detection that will be done in the monitor Stick Slip detection. Default: Dynamic torque.

Peak Torque Percentage Default: 80%, Must be >=10 and < 100.

Trigger Torque Default: 5, Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.

Maximum Number of Oscillations Default: 5, Must be >= 3 and <20.

Ti – Time

Measures the elapsed time during the monitor and checks that it is between the time limits. The time measurement starts at the start of the monitor and, if the Trigger Torque is specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter Description

Trigger Torque Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.

Must be > Low limit

TG – Torque Gradient

This monitor checks the gradient is within the limit.

Parameter Description

Gradient Angle Window Specifies Angle Window:

For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg.

For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg.

Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

End Point Check If set to Yes, only the gradient measured at the shut off point of the step is checked to be within the limits.

Trigger Torque The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Low Limit Lowest acceptable torque gradient. Must be >= -100.

High Limit Highest acceptable torque gradient. Must be > -100 and > Low limit.

Torque Filter Type The type of the filter:

None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

20 Hz

40 Hz

90 Hz

200 Hz

600 Hz

Number of Samples Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

Angle Offset Available when End Point Check is set to No. Specifies the degrees that the calculation of the gradient start after the trigger torque is passed for the first time.

TAW – Torque in Angle Window

This monitor checks that all torque values in the angle window are within the torque limits.

Parameter Description

Must be > Low limit

NOK if window is passed If set to Yes, status of this monitor is NOK if the end of angle window is not reached.

TRD – Torque Rate and Deviation

This step monitor measures and checks the torque rate, i.e. the ratio of torque vs. angle. The calculated torque rate is checked if it is within the torque rate limits defined by High Limit and Low Limit.

Parameter Description

Trigger Torque Torque of the angle start point.

Start Point Angle When Start point angle has been measured from Trigger torque the measuring of the torque starts.

End Point Angle Angle point where the measuring of the torque is stopped.

End Point Torque Torque where the measuring of the torque is stopped.

Low Limit Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit Highest acceptable torque.

Cl – Click

Monitor to enable click torque and click angle results. This monitor has no settings, and can only be used in conjunction with the MWR step.

LD - Loosening Detection

This monitor can be used to check the torque and direction to see if a loosening is attempted when using the Wrench Production step strategy for an STWrench. If the applied torque is above the value set for Loosening Limit in the direction opposite to the configured thread direction of the program, the result shall be reported as NOK.

Step Restrictions

The following sections describe the step restrictions available for the PowerFocus 6000 Controller and the PowerFocus 6000 StepSync controller.

In the The PowerFocus 6000 StepSync controller, it is possible to use syncronization points in the tightening program and when any condition that is set for a restriction is met, the tool will be stopped immediately and the program jumps to the next synchronization point (only valid for the Power Focus 6000 StepSync and PF6 Flex System controllers), or the end of the program. Whereas for a PowerFocus 6000 controller, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program.

To make sure the tightening stops if something unexpected happens, it is possible to add restrictions to the multistep tightening program. For each restriction, select Repairable = Yes to allow retry when tightening stops. For each of the steps in a multistep program it is possible to have up to four restrictions.

The following restrictions are automatically added to every step that is added to the multistep tightening program.

Default step restrictions

Step Restriction Applicable steps

Step Restriction Maximum Time All except External Result and MWR

Step Restriction Applicable steps

Step Restriction Maximum Torque Tighten to Angle

Tighten to Torque+Angle

Turbo Loosening

Wait

Socket release

Run until Digital Input

Tighten to Trigger Release

Step Restriction Maximum Angle Tighten to Torque

TurboTight

Turbo Loosening

Tighten to DynaTork

Wait

Run until Digital Input

Loosen to Torque

Thread Cutting to Torque

Rundown

Tighten to Yield

Pulsing Rundown Snug

TensorPulse

CTh – Cross Thread

This restriction checks the angle from the point where torque passes Start torque (T1) to the point where the torque passes End torque (T2). If the angle measured from Start torque (T1) is higher than Maximum limit (Amax), the tool is stopped immediately.

When the torque passes End torque (T2), the measured angle is checked against the limit Minimum limit (Amin). If the angle is lower than this limit, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter Description In illustration

Start Torque Must be <=0. T1

End Torque Must be <=0. T2

Minimum Limit The low angle limit. Amin

Maximum Limit The high angle limit. Amax

A – Maximum Angle

This restriction measures the angle. If the measured angle reaches the Maximum Limit, the tool is stopped immediately. The angle is measured from the start of the restriction or, if specified, from the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time during the restriction.

Parameter Description

Trigger Torque If specified, this is the torque from where the angle is measured.

Maximum Limit If this limit is reached the tool is stopped immediately.

T – Maximum Torque

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Maximum limit, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter Description

Maximum Limit If the torque reaches this specified limit the tool is stopped immediately.

Ti – Maximum Time

This restriction checks the time. If Maximum Limit is reached, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter Description

Maximum Limit If this time is elapsed, the tool is stopped immediately.

RH – Rehit

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Detection Torque, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program. It is only possible to add step Rehit restriction to the first step of the multistep tightening program. Once the Rehit restriction has been added to the first step it shall not be possible to move the step to any other position within the tightening program. The Rehit restriction has to be deleted from the first step in order to move it to other position in the tightening program.

Parameter Description

Detection Torque If the measured torque exceeds the Detection Torque, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program. Must be greater than zero.

RT – Rescinding Torque

This restriction checks the torque and if the measured torque drops below the condition of the restriction the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to end of the program. There are two methods of Rescinding Torque Restrictions for Torque and Angle control processes

Parameter Description

Type Torque control processes or Angle control processes.

Torque control processes: Torque control processes checks the torque. If the measured torque drops below the Rescinding Torque Limit the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program. For the restriction to be active the torque must first exceed 110 % of the Rescinding Torque Limit

Angle control processes: This restriction checks the maximum torque reached during the restriction. For the restriction to be active the torque must first exceed the Trigger Torque. If the measured torque drops below the maximum torque for longer time than Rescinding Torque Time the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program.

Cable tools have the option of choosing Rescinding Torque for Angle. This restriction is controlled by two parameters: Peak Torque Percentage and Rescending Torque Time. Percentage sets the downward deviation from the last peak torque, and Rescending Torque Time sets the duration (between 5 and 500 ms) of that deviation. Only when both conditions (equal to or lower than the indicated percentage for the set duration) are met, will the program be interrupted and jump to the end.

Default: 10 Nm. Must be > 0.

Rescinding Torque Limit

TG – Torque Gradient

This restriction checks the gradient and if it is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program.

Parameter Description

Gradient Angle Window Specifies Angle Window:

For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1 deg.

For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20 deg.

Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Trigger Torque Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Minimum Limit Must be >= -100.

Maximum Limit Must be > -100 and > Low limit.

Torque Filter Type The type of the filter:

None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

20 Hz

40 Hz

90 Hz

200 Hz

600 Hz

Number of Samples Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

TAW – Torque in Angle Window

This restriction checks that the measured torque in the Angle Window Length is between the Torque limits. If the measured torque is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end. The Angle Window Length starts at the Start Angle from the point that the torque first passed the Trigger Torque. If Trigger Torque is not set, then the Start Angle begins at the start of the restriction.

If the end of the Angle Window Length is not reached, the status of the restriction is NOK.

Parameter Description

Window Length Must be >0

Maximum Limit Must be <= Minimum limit

TCD - Torque vs Current Deviation

This restriction verifies that all current measurements converted to the corresponding torque are, at most, the Maximum deviation away from the actual torque measured with the torque transducer. The restriction starts when the torque reaches Trigger Torque for the first time during the step and is active until the step reaches its target.

If Trigger Torque is never reached, the monitor will report OK.

Parameter Description

Maximum Deviation Default: 1, Must be > 0

Result Reporters

The result reporters makes it possible to extract specific values of selected producer from the result. The result reporters belong to a step but has to be tied to the monitor/restriction from which they will read the values. Only monitors or restrictions located in the same step as the result reporter can be selected. A result reporter is added to a step using drag and drop (in the same way as monitors and restrictions). Each result reporter is responsible for reporting a specific result value, for example, Rundown Angle, Final Torque, Prevailing Torque.

It is possible to tie a result reporter to:

program monitors

step monitors

step restrictions

Each result reporter defines a final value type:

FA – Final Angle

FC – Final Current

FT – Final Torque

PT – Prevailing Torque

RA – Rundown Angle

ST – Self-tap Torque

General Parameters

Parameter Description

Producer Specifies which monitor/restriction produces the value.

Value Specifies which value to show from the selected producer.

Limitations:

It is only possible to add a result reporter on a monitor/restriction belonging to a step in main path or a program monitor/program restriction.

There may exist several reporters on a step if they are of different type.

There may exist a result reporter of for example type final angle on every step and program monitor angle.

For those monitor/restrictions that have more than one result value it is possible to add more than one result reporter if the result reporters are of different types.

There may not exist several result reporters of the same type on a step or on a program monitor/restriction.

There is only one result reported for each possible final value type.

Rules:

The internal number of a result item has to be the same as for the corresponding result reporter.

The internal number of a monitor/restriction result has to be the same as the internal number of the monitor/restriction in the configuration.

The step results has to be ordered according to the order of execution. The first executed step has to be first.

Possible values reported by a result reporter if present in the monitor/restriction/step:

The monitors/restrictions measured value (as float or integer)

The monitors/restrictions high and low limits

Status

Torque trigger and angle trigger

Angle target and torque target (read from the step)

Possible values for status:

Low

OK

High

Other

NotSet

The target values do not belong to any step monitor so the target values are taken from the step that the monitor belongs to.

Adding a Multistep Program

1. In the Tightening menu, click on the Multistep program library.

1. Click on the Plus icon top right and choose the appropriate type of program in the pop-up window (Tightening or Loosening).

Deleting a Multistep Program

1. In the Tightening menu, click on the Multistep program library.

1. In the list, click on the multistep tightening program you want to delete.

1. In the program itself, at the bottom left, click on Delete.

1. Click Yes in the pop-up window to confirm your choice.

Settings for a Multistep Program

General Settings

Parameter Description

Name A user defined name for the multistep program.

Thread Direction Direction of the threads, either clockwise (CW) or counter clockwise (CCW).

Loosening Program Indicate if a loosening program is available. Choose from the list of available loosening programs in the controller.

Type Type of program, either Tightening or Loosening.

Program Start Gives the torque level for generating a result. If left blank, the result is generated every time the tool is started; otherwise result is only generated from the set torque level.

Program End Torque Gives the torque value that stops a multistep tightening. The signal 168 - Program End is true when, after a multistep tightening Program End Torque has reached, and Program End Timeout has elapsed. Default value for Program End Torque is Tool max torque * 0.03.

Program End Timeout Gives the time value (in seconds) that stops a multistep tightening. The signal 168 - Program End is true when, after a multistep tightening Program End Torque has reached, and Program End Timeout has elapsed. Default value for Program End Timeout is 0 seconds.

Turns True Angle Compensation on or off (default is Off).

True Angle Compensation

Attachment Tuning

Parameter Description

Use attachment tuning Select whether attachment tuning should be on or off.

Gear ratio The gear ratio value can be between 0.5 and 4.0.

Efficiency tuning The efficiency tuning value can be between 0.5 and 1.0.

Program Monitor

Parameter Description

Angle Turn angle monitoring On or Off for the entire program. If Active in steps and Trigger Torque are left blank, angle monitoring will start at program start.

Active in steps

Sets a range of steps the angle monitoring is valid for. If no end step is specified, angle monitoring will stop at the last step of the program that is not a Socket Release step.

Type Type of angle monitoring. Choose between:

Peak Angle: the highest angle reached during the monitor

Angle at Peak Torque: the angle at the point where the highest torque was reached during the monitor

(Not available for STB tools)

Shut Off Angle: the angle at the shut-off point of the step

Angle at End: the angle at the end of the monitor, including the brake, if active.

Trigger torque

Sets the value of the trigger torque for angle monitoring.

For STB tools, Trigger Torque will only activate in the tightening direction when executing a tightening program; and only in the loosening direction when executing a loosening program.

Low limit Sets angle monitoring (program) lower limit.

High limit Sets angle monitoring (program) higher limit.

Torque Turn Torque monitoring On or Off for the entire program. If Active in steps is left blank, torque monitoring will start at program start.

Active in steps

Sets a range of steps the torque monitoring is valid for. If no end step is specified, torque monitoring will stop at the last step of the program that is not a Socket Release step.

Type Type of angle monitoring:

Peak Torque: the highest torque reached during the monitor.

Shut Off Torque: the torque at the shut-off point of the step.

Low limit Sets torque monitoring (program) lower limit.

High limit Sets torque monitoring (program) higher limit.

Program Restrictions

Parameter Description

Maximum Time Limit

Set amount in seconds. This restriction checks the total time for the tightening and if it exceeds the Time High limit the tool is stopped immediately. The time is measured from the start of the program.

Maximum Torque Limit

This restriction checks the torque and if the measured torque exceeds the Torque High limit the tool is stopped immediately.

Reporters

This enables the user to choose which values (from monitors/restrictions) shall be shown as final values. Click Add to choose a result reporter to be tied to a program monitor/restriction value.

Parameter Description

Reporter Select a result reporter.

Producer Select which monitor/restriction produces the value.

Value Select which value to show from the selected producer.

Trace Configuration

The trace configuration can be done on program level or for each step. The default configuration is set on the program level and can be overridden in each step as needed.

Here, enabling this function allows the configuration to be done on program level.

Parameter Description

Enabled On: Enables the trace resolution configuration on program level.

Off: The trace recording is done with the same resolution for the whole tightening. In this case, the trace points are evenly distributed in time over the whole tightening. For each time slot (0.25 ms) two values (the minimum and the maximum measured value) are displayed in the trace. The maximum number of samples in this format is 2000.

Sample Time: specifies how often samples should be stored in the trace by specifying a sample time in ms.

Sample Type

Sample Angle: specifies how often samples should be stored in the trace by specifying a sample in deg.

Sample Time

Choose the sample time from the drop-down list (0.25 - 1000 ms)

Sample Angle

Choose the sample angle from the drop-down list (0.25 - 20 degree)

Validation

Parameter Description

Validate against tool values Use On if tool is known and set Max Torque and Max Speed.

Use Off if tool is not known.

Tool Drop-down for choosing the tool to validate against.

Max torque Max torque of the tool to validate against.

Max speed Max speed of the tool to validate against.

Creating a Multistep Program

To create a multistep program, drag and drop steps, monitors and restrictions in the tightening area.

Steps can only be placed between the start and end points of the program, whilst monitors and restrictions can only be placed on steps.

Function Description

Start and end points

Start and end points of the multistep program. All steps must be placed between these two points.

Adding a step

Drag a step from the list and drop it in the desired position between the start and end points.

Moving a step

Click and hold a step and move it to the desired position

Showing step properties

Click on the step to reveal the properties

Closing step properties

Click anywhere in the tightening area to close the properties menu

Deleting a step

Open the step properties and click Delete at the bottom of the menu

Adding a restriction/monitor

Drag a restriction/monitor from the list and drop it on the appropriate step.

Moving a restriction/monitor

Click and hold the icon (checkmark for monitor, stop sign for restriction) and drag and drop it on the appropriate step

Showing restriction/monitor properties

Click on the restriction/monitor icon to reveal the properties menu

Closing restriction/monitor properties

Click anywhere in the tightening area to close the properties menu

Deleting a restriction/monitor

Open the restriction/monitor properties and click on Delete at the bottom of the menu

Step error

Monitor/Restriction error

When a validation error occurs in a monitor or restriction, that monitor or restriction will be marked. Note that when the monitor/restriction properties are opened, the parameter causing the error will also be marked.

Forbidden placement

When a particular placement (of a step, monitor or restriction) is not allowed, the placeholder icon will not be shown.

Multistep Program Tool Compatibility Table

The availability of steps, monitors and restrictions depends on the license installed on the controller.

The table below shows which steps, monitors and restrictions are available for the various tools.

Supported Tools ES ST STR IXB SR SL (Low Voltage) BCV-RE/BCP-RE MWR STB QST STW External Tool

PF6000-Handheld X X X - X X X X X X X X

PF6000-StepSync - X X - X X - - - X - -

PF6000-Fixtured - - - - - - - - - X - -

Step Type ES ST STR IXB SR SL (Low Voltage) BCV-RE/BCP-RE MWR STB QST STW External Tool

Tighten to Angle X X X X X X - - X X - -

Tighten to Torque X X X X X X - - X X - -

Tighten to Trigger Release X X X X X X - - X* - - -

Tighten to Torque + Angle X X X X X X - - X X - -

Tighten to Torque AND Angle X X X X X X - - X X - -

Tighten to DynaTork X X X X X X - - X X - -

Wait X X X X X X - - X X - -

Socket Release X X X X X X - - X X - -

Run until Digital Input X X X - X X - - - X - -

Tighten to Torque or Angle X X X X X X - - X X - -

Loosen to Angle X X X X X X - - X X - -

Loosen to Torque X X X X X X - - X X - -

Loosen to Trigger Release X X X X X X - - X* - - -

Thread Cutting to Torque X X X X X X - - X X - -

Synchronization Point - - - - - - - - - X## - -

Engage X X X X X X - - - X - -

Rundown X X X X X X - - - X - -

Tighten to Yield X X X X X X - - - X - -

Tighten to Yield M2 - - - - - - - - - X - -

External Result X X X - X X X - X X** - X

Step Type ES ST STR IXB SR SL (Low Voltage) BCV-RE/BCP-RE MWR STB QST STW External Tool

Clutch - - - - - - X - - - - -

Clutch Loosen - - - - - - X - - - - -

Mechatronic Wrench (MWR) - - - - - - - X - - - -

Torque Calibration - - - - - - - - - X# - -

Wrench Production - - - - - - - - - - X -

Wrench Quality - - - - - - - - - - X -

Monitors (Evaluated at End of Step) ES ST STR IXB SR SL (Low voltage) BCV-RE/BCP-RE MWR STB QST STW External Tool

Time X X X X X X - - X X - -

Angle X X X X X X - X X X X -

Peak Torque X X X X X X - X X X X -

Shut Off Torque X X X X X X - - X X - -

Torque Rate Deviation X X X X X X - - - X - -

Post Thread Cut Angle X X X X X X - - X X - -

Post Thread Cut Peak Torque X X X X X X - - X X - -

Torque in Angle Window X X X X X X - - X X - -

Post View Torque High X X X X X X - - X X - -

Post View Torque Low X X X X X X - - X X - -

Angle from Yield X X X X X X - - - X - -

Stick-Slip detection X X X X X X - - - X - -

Prevailing Torque X X X X X X - - X X - -

Shut Off Current X X X X X X - - X X - -

Click - - - - - - - X - - - -

Torque Calibration - - - - - - - - - X# - -

Loosening Detection - - - - - - - - - - X -

Restrictions (Immediate Stop) ES ST STR IXB SR SL (Low voltage) BCV-RE/BCP-RE MWR STB QST STW External Tool

Maximum Torque X X X X X X - - X X - -

Maximum Angle X X X X X X - - X X - -

Maximum Time X X X X X X - - X X - -

Cross Thread X X X X X X - - X X - -

Torque Gradient X X X X X X - - - X - -

Rescinding Torque - Torque control process X X X X X X - - X X - -

Rescinding Torque - Angle control process X X X X X X - - - X - -

Torque Vs Current Deviation X X X X X X - - - X - -

Torque in Angle Window X X X X X X - - X X - -

Rehit X X X X X X - - X X### - -

Program Monitor Type (Evaluate at end of program) ES ST STR IXB SR SL (Low voltage) BCV-RE/BCP-RE MWR STB QST STW External Tool

Program Monitor Angle X X X X X X - - X X*** - -

Program Restriction Type (Immediate Stop) ES ST STR IXB SR SL (Low voltage) BCX MWR STB QST STW External Tool

Program Restriction Torque High X X X X X X - X X X X -

Program Restriction Time High X X X X X X - X X X - -

• The STB tool shall only allow loosen to trigger/tighten to trigger release step in a multistep loosening/tightening program.

** External result is not supported in a PF6000-Fixtured/StepSync system.

*** Program Monitor Angle is not supported in a PF6000-Fixtured/StepSync system.

# Only supported by PF6000-Fixtured systems.

## Only supported by PF6000-Fixtured and PF6000-StepSync systems.

### Not supported by PF6000-Fixtured systems.

STB Tools and Multistep

Due to the wireless nature of STB tools, some multistep functions and behaviors may differ. Besides the general limitations listed here, descriptions of multistep functions will be additional information on STB tools where necessary.

Program Validation

All tightening programs will be validated for compatibility with STB tools before the program is downloaded to the tool. If the chosen tightening program is not compatible with the tool, the tool will be locked. When this error occurs, it will trigger event 5030, "Configuration complexity exceeded".

To unlock the tool, reduce the complexity of the tightening program, or choose a different tightening program altogether.

Step Configuration Stages

The controller tightening programs need parameters to be set in order to execute the programs. Selecting a Strategy and either the Target torque or Target angle are mandatory. Other settings are optional. It is also possible to monitor the tightening as it progresses by adding limits within which the torque or angle rotation must remain.

The tightening procedure is divided into four stages: Start, Rundown, Tightening and Stop.

Typical tightening curve

The figure is typical of how tightenings are described. The curves represent how speed, torque and angle vary over time. All tightening strategies are represented in this way. Parameters, monitors and limits are also shown in detailed figures.

A task is defined from the time a trigger is pressed until the tightening target is reached, or an error occurs.

A combination of a tightening strategy together with specific parameter settings forms a tightening program.

The user can create many different tightening programs, and one of them is selected at runtime.

Start Stage

The optional Start step initiates the tightening, enables socket and thread finding, and the option to detect rehits.

Direction

Direction defines the tightening direction of the spindle to clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW). The rotation of the spindle will always be in this direction, except when loosening and during the conditioning step used in the Three step strategy.

Parameter Description Default value

Thread direction Defines the tightening direction of the spindle. Clockwise

Soft Start

During Soft start it is possible to set the speed, the maximum torque and the the rotation angle to help the screw to enter the thread, and to prevent the tool being jerked out of position when the tool trigger is pressed.

Parameter name Description

Default value

Soft start Enables setting of the tool’s speed, angle and maximum torque to facilitate the screw entering the thread.

On

Off: Soft start is turned off.

On: Soft start is turned on.

Speed Defines the speed during Soft start. 35 rpm

Angle Defines the angle to turn the spindle for the screw to enter the thread. 90°

Torque max Defines the upper torque limit during Soft start. If Torque max is exceeded, the tightening is aborted and an error message is given. The tightening will be considered NOK.

1.25 Nm

Rehit Detection

When Rehit detection is activated, it is possible to detect a screw that has already been tightened.

Default value

Parameter Description

Rehit detection

Detects attempts to tighten an already tightened screw.

Early

Early: the Rehit detection Early option terminates the tightening immediately when a rehit is detected and ends the tightening in the most ergonomic possible way. To be able to use the Rehit detection Early option, Soft start must be set to On. This is because the Soft start torque max value is used as the torque limit beyond which the tightening is considered a rehit. The tightening is considered as NOK and a rehit error is indicated.

Complete: to make a rehit detection when Soft start is not used, the Rehit detection Complete option must be used. Rehit detection Complete does not terminate the tightening until all tightening steps have been executed and consequently takes longer. The tightening is considered a rehit if the speed never reaches half the rundown speed, and a rehit error is indicated. The tightening is considered as NOK.

Off: no rehit detection is performed.

Current Monitoring

Current monitoring provides an extra security to monitor the tightening torque and is a complement to the torque sensor in the tool.

At final target torque, the rotor current is measured and converted to a torque value. If the calculated torque is within 10% of the measured torque, the tightening is considered to be OK.

Parameter Description Default

Switch with On - Off position.

Off

Current monitoring

Off: Current monitoring is disabled and the tool torque is measured by the torque sensor.

On: the current is measured at final torque target and converted to a torque value. The calculated torque is compared to the measured torque. If the difference is within 10%, the tightening is considered OK.

Current monitoring is not implemented for Turbo Tight, Rotate, Pulsing and STwrench strategies.

TrueAngle Compensation

Certain tools are equipped with a gyro and measure the tool rotation during tightening. If the tool is rotated during tightening, the angle measurement may be corrupted. This leads to faulty tightening if made to angle references. For variations within specified limits, the controller can compensate for these rotations and make a correct tightening.

If the tool rotation is outside specified limits, the tightening is aborted and the result status NOK is reported. Additional information reports Tool movement exceeded.

Parameter Description Default

TrueAngle compensation Available for all tightening strategies except Rotate.

On

Tools which have a crowfoot installed as an attachment do not support the parameter TrueAngle compensation.

Tool movement limits - Negative

Only visible if TrueAngle compensation is on.

Defines the maximum negative rotation of the tool. If the value is exceeded the tightening is terminated and an error is reported. Expressed in a numeric angle value.

Tool movement limits - Positive

Only visible if TrueAngle compensation is on.

Defines the maximum positive rotation of the tool. If the value is exceeded the tightening is terminated and an error is reported. Expressed in a numeric angle value.

Only tools with gyro have the capability to measure the tool movement.

Rundown Stage

The part of the tightening from when the screw enters the thread until just before the screw head touches the underlying surface and snug is reached. The torque required during rundown does not contribute to any clamping force.

Parameter Description Default value

Rundown speed Defines the speed during the Rundown step Tool max speed

Selftap

The Selftap step enables tightening where the rundown torque required is greater than the Rundown complete torque, for example when tightening thin layers of metal using self-threading (or self-tapping) screws. The selftap window starts when the torque value reaches SelftapTorqueMin/2. The torque must reach over SelftapTorqueMin, but not pass SelftapTorqueMax, during the angle window.

Parameter Description Default value

Selftap Activates the Selftap step. Off

Speed Defines the speed during Selftap. Soft start speed or 5% of ToolMaxSpeed

Length Defines the angle to turn the socket during Selftap. Measured from the end of the Start step. 360°

Torque min Torque value for lower Selftap limit. 0 Nm

Torque max Torque value for upper Selftap limit. Tool max torque

Rundown Torque Limits

The friction between the nut and joint can vary. This can cause the torque needed to run a nut down a thread, before engagement with the joint surface takes place, to vary as well. These effects could be, for example, hole interference, prevailing torque or varying lubrication.

Monitoring the rundown torque can be useful when running down a lock nut which has a plastic insert in the threads to help the fastener resist vibration. This will require a higher torque, known as prevailing torque, to overcome the interference.

Parameter Description Default value

Rundown torque limits Sets Rundown torque limits to On or Off.

Off

Off: No limits are set.

On: Torque limits and angle interval are set.

Offset Angle offset before the Angle interval begins. 0°

Length Angle defining the Rundown torque limit section. 360°

Torque min Torque value for lower Rundown torque limit. 0 Nm

Torque max Torque value for upper Rundown torque limit. 19% of Target torque

Rundown Angle Limits

By monitoring the angle of rotation during rundown, errors such as missing washers or screws with incorrect thread size or length can be detected. For example, threads that are too long would require a greater turning angle for the screw to reach snug.

Parameter Description Default value

Off

Rundown angle limits

Activates Rundown angle limits. The angle limits are set relative to when the tool trigger is pressed or when a specified torque value is reached. Angle limits will not be checked during Selftap if Selftap is activated.

Off: No limits are set.

From trigger:The system starts to monitor the tightening angle as soon as the tool trigger is pressed and reports if angle or time limits are violated.

From torque: The system starts to monitor the tightening angle from the specified value and reports if angle or time limits are violated.

Torque value from where Rundown angle limits are set. 10% of Target Torque

Angle min Angle value for lower angle limit from starting point. 100°

Angle max Angle value for upper angle limit from starting point. 1000°

Time min Minimum time (in milliseconds) for the step. Measured from the start of the step. 10 ms

Time max Maximum time (in milliseconds) for the step. Measured from the start of the step. 5000 ms

Post View Torque

Some joints have a torque peak prior to Rundown complete. Post view torque makes it possible to monitor torque values during two specified angular intervals. The interval starts are defined as an angle prior to Rundown complete and torque is then monitored for a specified angular interval.

Post view torque is therefore similar to Rundown torque limits except that the maximum and minimum limits can be positioned independently of each other and can differ in length to better control the outcome of the rundown step.

Parameter Description Default value

Post view torque Post view torque makes it possible to monitor torque values during two specified angular intervals. Off

Torque min Torque value for lower Post view torque limit.

Torque min offset Angle offset before the Post view torque min interval begins. 720°

Torque min length Angle length defining the Post view torque min section. 90°

Torque max Torque value for upper Post view torque limit.

Torque max offset Angle offset before the Post view torque max interval begins. 360°

Torque max length Angle length defining the Post view torque max section. 90°

Rundown Complete

Rundown complete sets if the screw has reached snug. It ends the Rundown step so that the tightening step can be entered.

Default value

Parameter Description

Rundown complete

Specifies how to control when snug is reached.

At torque

At torque: Specifies the torque value for when the rundown step is completed.

Defines the torque value for when snug is reached and the rundown step is completed. Rundown complete must be smaller than First torque in multi- step strategies or Target torque in the TurboTight strategy.

Stop Stage

The Stop stage terminates the tightening so that the socket can be released.

Soft Stop

Soft stop causes the tightening stop in a more ergonomic fashion.

Do not stop tools within the time interval of 50-300 ms, as this is known to make it feel like an uncomfortable stop.

Default value

Parameter Description

Soft stop Turns the Soft stop on or off.

Off

Off: No Soft stop is used.

On: Soft stop is activated. When target torque is reached, the tool speed is immediately decreased to 75%. Then the speed is decreased to zero in at most 40 ms.

Loosening a Screw

By setting the loosening parameters, you can control the behavior of loosening for a specific tightening program. Specify the loosening speed and torque to ensure that the screw is unscrewed as desired, so that the screw thread does not break, regardless of what tool you use.

A loosening is considered OK when Run-up torque is reached. However, the screw will probably not have been fully run up by then. The screw should now be able to be turned using a low torque and the speed can be increased. The operator will need to proceed with the loosening until it is considered finished.

Parameter name Description Default value

Detection torque The minimum torque required to begin performing a loosening operation and produce a loosening result. 7% ToolMaxTorque

3.5% ToolMaxTorque

Run-up torque When the torque falls below Run-up torque, the loosening is considered to be OK.

Loosening speed Loosening speed will be attained when Run-up torque is reached. ToolMaxSpeed

Stage Parameter Descriptions

Target Torque Limits

By setting the Target torque limits , it is possible to discard a tightening should the torque result not fall within the specified torque limits. A too high torque can cause the screw to deform as a result of passing the yield point, and can even break, or can cause the stripping of threads. Not enough torque result in the clamping force not being enough to withstand the forces for which the joint is designed.

Parameter Description Default value

Torque limits The tightening is considered as NOK if the torque result is outside the range defined by Torque min and Torque max.

Auto

Auto: Torque limits are automatically set to the default values specified for Torque min and Torque max.

Manual: Enables the Torque limit values to be set manually.

Torque min Torque value for lower torque limit. Can be entered if Manual has been selected. 95% of Target torque

Torque max Torque value for upper torque limit. Can be entered if Manual has been selected. 120% of Target torque

The parameter Measure torque at can have different values. By default the torque is measured at torque peak. The possible values of the parameter are listed in the table below.

Name Description

Max torque value Measures the highest torque value during the tightening.

Value at peak angle Measures the torque value at the highest angle value.

Value at shutoff Measures the last torque value before entering the break step.

Target Angle Limits

With Target angle limits set, it is possible to monitor whether the nut is turned the desired angle during the tightening.

Parameter Description Default value

Off

Angle limits Choose the section of the tightening, in degrees, in which to monitor the angle.

1. Off: No limits are checked.

1. From Rundown complete: The monitoring window is set from when the Rundown complete torque is reached.

1. From torque: The monitoring window is set from when the specified torque value is reached. Torque must be greater than Rundown complete

torque.

1. From First target: The monitoring is set from when First target is reached. This option is not available if TurboTight is chosen.

1. Auto: The angle monitoring limits are automatically calculated by the controller

1. Manual: The angle monitoring limits are manually entered.

Torque value from where angle limits are set.

Torque value from where angle limits are set. 75% of Target Torque

Angle min Angle value for lower angle limit 90°

Angle max Angle value for upper angle limit 720°

Time min Minimum time (in milliseconds) for the step. Measured from the start of the step. 10 ms

For TurboTight: 0 ms

Time max Maximum time (in milliseconds) for the step. Measured from the start of the step. 1000 ms

For TurboTight: 40 ms

Position 1-4 are valid if the target is torque. Position 5-6 are valid if the target is angle.

The parameter Measure angle at can have different values. The parameter is only available when angle monitoring is turned on for the tightening program used. By default the angle is measured at Max angle value. The possible values of the parameter are listed in the table below.

Name Description

Value at peak torque Measures the angle at the highest torque value.

Max angle value Measures the highest angle during tightening.

Value at shutoff Measures the last angle value before entering the break step.

Torque Compensation

By using torque compensation, the actual clamping force applied to the joint can be better determined and the scatter in the applied clamping force can be reduced.

The torque compensation point is set by referring back to a specified angle from Rundown complete and calculating a value for the torque used during rundown. This is then compensated for when creating the preload in the screw by adding the torque value calculated in the torque compensation point to the Target torque.

Parameter Description Default value

Off

Torque compensation Enables adjustment if the Target torque for torque used in the rundown step.

Off: No compensation is made.

On: Manually sets the Torque compensation point.

Residual Torque Correlation Factor

The term Residual torque correlation factor is similar to a calibration and adjusts between the dynamic torque, measured in the electrical tool, and the residual torque, measured by a control tool.

The Residual torque correlation factor is available for all tools running the TurboTight strategy and the TensoPulse tightening strategy. It is also available for the battery pulse tools that are supported by the controller.

When using a Residual torque correlation factor that differs from 100, the reported Final torque is no longer the dynamic torque measured by the tool transducer.

The dynamic torque measurement uses an internal torque transducer that constantly measures the torque. When the target torque is reached, the tool stops and the result is evaluated and reported. The measured final torque in the transducer is affected by the joint condition, the tool speed, gears and sockets.

The residual torque is measured after the tightening is completed. It is the torque needed to continue or restart the tightening to a higher level. The residual torque is determining the clamping force in the joint.

A dynamic torque measurement is highly repetitive but may differ between tool type and tool speed.

A handheld calibrated torque wrench provides high accuracy measuring the residual torque but has higher variations due to joint relaxation, torque decay, friction or operator technique.

The Residual torque correlation factor is a compensation between the dynamic torque and the residual torque. The factor should be determined by conducting tests. The selected tightening program is performed a few times and the dynamic torque is recorded. The tightenings are also manually measured to determine the residual torque.

The Residual torque correlation factor can be calculated by dividing a residual torque by a dynamic torque. TheResidual torque correlation factor is presented as percent and is by default 100%. This means the reported dynamic torque value has not been modified.

Parameters Function

Target torque The tool target torque set for the tightening using the TurboTight strategy.

Final dynamic torque The final torque reported as the result of the performed tightening.

Dynamic torque The dynamic torque measured by a reference transducer.

Residual torque The desired residual torque that ensures the desired clamping force.

Residual torque correlation factor The compensation factor between residual torque and dynamic torque

An example of how torque tuning can be used:

The TurboTight strategy is selected. The joint shall be tightened to 12 Nm to reach the desired clamping force. The following set up is made:

Example settings Value Function

Target torque 12 Nm The programmed desired target torque in the controller

Residual torque correlation factor 100 The compensation factor between residual torque and dynamic torque

A number of tightenings are made. After each tightening the joint is checked with a calibrated torque wrench. The average is calculated and the following result has been found:

Initial parameters and results Value Function

Target torque 12 Nm The programmed target torque in the controller.

Final torque 12 Nm The final torque reported as the result of the performed tightening.

Dynamic torque 12 Nm The uncompensated measured torque from the tool transducer.

Residual torque 10 Nm The residual torque measured with a calibrated torque wrench or other test tool.

Residual torque correlation factor 100 % The compensation factor between residual torque and dynamic torque

The testing shows that the residual torque is too low to produce the desired clamp force. The Residual torque correlation factor is calculated to 0.83, which is 83 %. An adjustment of the tuning factor is made and the following result is obtained.

Final parameters and results Value Function

Target torque 12 Nm The programmed target torque in the controller.

Final torque 12 Nm The final torque reported as the result of the performed tightening.

Dynamic torque 14.5 Nm The uncompensated measured torque from the tool transducer.

Residual torque 12 Nm The desired residual torque that ensures the desired clamping force.

Residual torque correlation factor 83 % The compensation factor between residual torque and dynamic torque.

What this shows is that we need to tighten a bit more than the specified target, to compensate for differences and to reach the desired torque in the joint.

Trigger Lost

NOK on trigger lost is a tightening program setting in the tightening stage of the program, which controls whether or not it is allowed to release the tool trigger before the target condition has been reached. The setting can be set to On or Off. Below is a description of the two states.

Switch setting Description

On Releasing the trigger before reaching the target condition will result in a NOK tightening.

Off Releasing the trigger before reaching the target condition will result in an OK tightening as long as all other conditions have been met.

The default behavior is that premature trigger release shall not be allowed.

Availability

The NOK on trigger lost is available in the following tightening strategies: Rotate, Quick Step, Two Step, Three Step and Four Step. Note that the setting is only available when the Target of the program is set to Angle (not Torque).

Tightening Program Configuration - General Parameters

Changes made to tightening programs in any section need to be actively applied by clicking the Apply button in the bottom right corner of the GUI. Alternatively, changes can be undone by clicking the Undo button in the same location.

When navigating away from the section where changes have been made (by using the Back, Home or Result button), the user will be presented with a warning pop-up where the changes can also be applied or undone. The user cannot proceed without applying or undoing changes.

The general tightening program settings is used to set up and manage the tightening programs by naming tightening programs, to make general tightening settings such as selecting tightening strategy, Manual or Quick prog mode, and to set the tightening program target value.

For more information about tightening parameters, see Start Stage, Rundown Stage, Tightening Strategies, and Stop Stage.

For more information about Loosening parameters, see Loosening a screw.

Name

Use the Name field to give the tightening program a name. This name will be stored with the tightening results and sent to ToolsNet (if applicable). The name can be maximum of 32 characters long.

Strategy

Strategy sets the tightening strategy to be used with the tightening program.

For more information about the available strategies and the relevant parameters, see "Tightening Strategies".

Target

The Quick step, Two step, and Three step strategies enable the choice of tightening towards either a Target torque or a Target angle value. When TurboTight is activated, only the Target torque option is available.

Time Monitoring (elapsed time)

Time monitoring is available for all tightening strategies except Rotate. Time monitoring can be activated when angle limits are activated. Time monitoring is available for the rundown step and the final step of the tightening step.

To minimize the risk of unexpected jerk at the end of the tightening when using the TurboTight tightening strategy, make sure to activate Time monitoring.

Since handling the trace takes time, there is always a short difference between the Program elapsed time compared to Step elapsed time . This is especially noticeable in programs containing only one step.

When using an STB tool it is not possible to use time monitoring if all monitoring options are switched on.

Attachment Tuning

Attachment tuning gives the possibility to compensate for front attachments on the tool. The compensation can be made for each tightening program.

An operator can hot swap an attachment and then select a tightening program tuned for that specific attachment.

Attachment tuning is available for all conventional strategies except for the STwrench.

1. In Tightening program settings, set Attachment tuning enabled to Yes

1. Click on Tightening parameters > Edit

1. Click on the start step.

1. Under Attachment tuning, set Use attachment tuning to Yes

1. Set the necessary parameters for Gear ratio and Efficiency tuning (see table below).

Parameters for Attachment tuning

Attachment tuning Description Default

Attachment gear ratio The Attachment gear ratio is needed to compensate the angle.

1.0

Minimum: 0.5

Maximum: 3.6

Socket rotation speed = Tool speed / gear ratio

Efficiency tuning Attachment gear ratio combined with the Efficiency tuning is needed to compensate the torque.

1.0

Minimum: 0.5

Maximum: 1.0

For example 0.9 means 10% efficiency loss.

Working with the Batch Sequence Tab

Controller features, such as the Low Reaction Tightening Strategies and controller-wide functions among others, require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the controller. Please refer to Licenses (FMS) for more detailed information on licenses.

Batch sequences are used to perform a specified number of tightenings in a specific order. Each batch sequence is given a name.

Batch Sequence Settings

A batch sequence can consist of up to 99 batches, with a batch size of up to 99 tightenings. The batches in a batch sequence are carried out in the order listed, or by using a Socket selector to choose which batch to run.

Batch settings parameters

Default value

Parameter name Description

Lock tool on Batch sequence compl.

A batch sequence is completed when the batch sequence counter is equal to the batch sequence size.

On

On: The tool is locked and a tightening program or batch sequence must be selected to continue performing tightenings.

Off: After completion, the batch sequence is ready to be repeated.

Free order No: The configured batches will be executed in the order listed, provided they have been configured to perform tightenings. If socket has been specified, the system will prompt for the socket when the batch is to be performed.

No

Yes: The configured batches can be executed in any order. The operator must indicate to the system which batch is to be executed by using a Socket selector.

A batch is regarded as complete when all joints have been completed.

Increment on NOK Makes it possible to increment the batch counter value even though the tightening is reported as NOK. For Max consecutive NOK to work (the maximum number of times a single bolt can be tightenened), Increment on NOK must be set to No. Setting this parameter to Yes, will allow the sequence to move on to the next tightening.

No

Max consecutive NOK Maximum consecutive not OK tightenings (NOK) are a defined maximum allowed number of NOK consecutive tightenings in a batch. If the Max consecutive NOK number is reached, the event Too many NOK tightenings (4020) is displayed.

Decrement on loosening

Decrements the counter within the currently active batch. Completed batched cannot be decremented.

Never

Never: The setting is off. Counter is not decremented when loosening is performed in the active batch.

Always: decrements the counter in the active batch when loosening, if the last tightening was OK.

When last tightening was OK: decrements the counter when performing a loosening in the active batch, regardless of the previous tightening result.

Off

Sequence abort timer On: The selected batch sequence can be aborted within a specified time limit

Off: The selected batch sequence cannot be aborted.

Abort time (10-600) The number of seconds during which the selected batch sequence can be aborted. 10

Batch Configuration

A batch is set up to perform a specified number of consecutive tightenings using the same tightening program. Batches must have tightening program and batch size specified in order to run.

Batch configuration parameters

Parameter Description

Tightening program The tightening program to use with the batch.

Batch size Number of tightenings the batch will perform.

Max. number of tightenings in one batch is 99.

Batch size 0 will give the batch an infinite number of tightenings.

Identifier number When using a Socket selector, this is the socket position used to activate the batch.

Working with the Sources Tab

External signals used as tasks for tightenings are configured in the Sources menu. Sources are accessories or similar connected to a virtual station. Two types of source tasks are available:

Source Tightening task

Source Batch task

Source Tightening is used to select a single tightening program.

Source Batch is used to select a batch sequence, a series of tightening programs.

For more information about selection of tasks, see Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station.

Source Tightening

The tightening menu shows a list of source tightening configurations. Separate lists can be linked to a Virtual Station by going to the Virtual Station in question, and choosing Task, Change task. There, a Source can be chosen as a task. Source tightenings link a specific tightening program to an identifier number. When the identifier number is sent to the controller (either by external digital signal, or, in cases where a socket selector is used, by lifting the corresponding socket in the selector) the linked program will run over and over until a different signal is sent (or socket is picked up). There is no batch counting.

Source Tightening lists can be set either in Control or Confirm mode.

When set to Control, an external source selects a tightening program by requesting an identifier number. In case of a socket selector, the identifier number is linked to a corresponding socket in the socket selector, and by lifting the socket the tightening program is selected.

In Confirm mode, the socket selector cannot be used as a controlling source. In this mode identifier numbers are linked to both a tightening program and a specific socket (indicated in an additional column in the list). When an identifier number is requested (by an external signal), the corresponding socket is prompted in the socket selector and the tightening program is activated when the operator lifts the socket (other sockets are disabled). If no socket is specified (that is, set to 0 in the Socket column), the tightening program is activated directly and the socket status is ignored.

Product Essentials Tutorials

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XtgT4tDSDJc

Creating a Source Tightening

Changes made to tightening programs in any section need to be actively applied by clicking the Apply button in the bottom right corner of the GUI. Alternatively, changes can be undone by clicking the Undo button in the same location.

When navigating away from the section where changes have been made (by using the Back, Home or Result button), the user will be presented with a warning pop-up where the changes can also be applied or undone. The user cannot proceed without applying or undoing changes.

1. Go to the Sources menu, then select Tightening on the left navigation.

1. Click the plus icon in the top right of the workspace.

1. Give the Source Tightening a name and select the correct Selector mode (Control or Confirm, depending on what is required).

1. By default, only one editable Identifier number will be available when creating a new Source Tightening. At the bottom of the

screen, click the plus icon to add more.

1. Give every item an identifier number

If a socket selector is used, the identifier numbers will correspond to the positions in the socket selector, i.e. Identifier number 1 corresponds to socket number 1 in the socket selector.

1. Choose a tightening program to link to each identifier number by clicking on Program and choosing from the list of tightening

programs.

Sources - max consecutive NOK

Max consecutive NOK can be set per Source Tightening or per individual program included in the Source Tightening.

Setting the max consecutive NOK per Source Tightening

1. Set Max consecutive NOK per program to No

1. Set the value in the Max consecutive NOK field.

Setting the max consecutive NOK per program

1. Set Max consecutive NOK per program to Yes

1. For every program in the Identifier selector configuration section, set the value in the Max NOK column.

Source Batch Sequence

The Source Batch configuration is found under the Batch option in the Sources menu.

The controller can be configured to select a batch sequence based on either an identifier number or an identifier string.

Input Description

Identifier number The number must be a positive integer number that can originate from an accessory or from an external control entity.

Identifier string The string must consist of ASCII characters and can originate from a scanner or from an external control entity.

Socket selector The use of one or several socket selectors.

Product Essentials Tutorials

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-dTjDz6ravw

Creating a Source Batch

1. Go to the Sources menu, then select Batch sequence on the left navigation.

1. Click the plus icon in the top right of the workspace.

1. Give the Source Batch a name

1. Set the Abort on new identifier to Yes if scanning a new identifier string should abort the previous scan.

1. Select the Identifier method (String for text, or Number for numerical strings)

1. Set Free order to On if the strings should be able to be scanned in any order.

Identifier strings can be made up of up to 4 different strings. When free order is set to No, the strings need to be scanned in a specific order for the system to recognize the string.

1. If required, add an identifier string by clicking on the Plus icon in the Identifier string configuration section.

1. Click on the Name label for the identifier string you want to change the properties of (pop-up window). The following

properties can be indicated per string:

Name - the name of the string

Length - the length of the string. See Combining Identifier Strings for more information on concatenating strings.

Significant positions - used to specify which characters in the barcode string to read when putting together the string to match with your pre-defined string. The number of significant positions must match the number of characters in the pre- defined strings.

Saved positions - indicate which parts of each string used in the Source Batch is saved, and how they are represented in the log. In this field, indicate the positions in the string that need to be saved. Positions can constitute only parts of the entire string. If the field is left empty, the entire (concatenated) string will be saved. The table below shows some examples of saved position combinations.

Saved position values are comma-separated (without spaces), and ranges are indicated using a hyphen.

Identifier string Positions

String 1: 1234567 1-7

String 2: abcdef 8-13

String 3: GHIJKL 14-19

String 4: 890 20-22

Saved position examples

Saved positions Saved results

(empty) 1234567abcdefGHIJKL890

1-3,9,11,15,20-22 123bdH890

8-12,1-7,19,20-21 will be changed automatically to: 1-12,19-21 1234567abcdeL89

The ID field in the string properties window cannot be altered, but can only be used to navigate between the different strings.

An error may occur when Free order is set to On, and the lengths of the different strings are duplicated. The scanned sequence will then not activate a tightening program. To remedy this error, set Free order to Off, or adjust the string lengths.

1. Click Edit.

1. In the Edit window, indicate which strings (in the String contains column) should be linked to which Batch sequence (in the

Activates column). Click the plus icon at the bottom to add more strings.

Wildcards can be used when typing the "string contains". The wildcard(s) can be used at any position in the string. No Batch sequence is activated in case of an ambiguous matching result.

The wildcard is a . (period)

Configuring Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String

The positions in the barcode string are associated with a number between 1 and 1024. The first position of the string is 1 and the last is 1024.

The significant positions must be specified following the rules described in the table below. Barcode strings:

Description Significant positions Valid configuration Barcode string to match with pre-defined string

Significant positions in order 1,2,3,7,8 Ok ABCGH

Significant positions in optional order 7,1,2,3,8 Ok GABCH

Range of numbers 1–3,7-8 Ok ABCGH

Combining Identifier Strings

The identifier string that is used for matching is a combination of up to four strings from a factory management system or up to four scanner inputs that need to be combined into one string.

The Add and Delete command buttons manage how many strings are combined. The following parameters are available:

Parameters for combining identifier strings

Parameter Description

Check box Select an entry if it is to be deleted.

Name The string must be given a name.

Significant positions The comma-separated positions or ranges (separated by hyphen) in the combined string that are used for matching.

Saved positions The comma-separated positions or ranges in the strings that will be saved in the result.

If more than one identifier string is to be used, perform the following steps:

1. Press the Add command button to create a new entry in the table.

1. Issue the string a name.

1. Enter the length of the string.

1. Repeat steps 1-3 for every string to be added. Up to four strings can be combined.

The Start-End parameters in each row define the individual string positions in the combined string identifier that is used in the next step of the matching process.

The first part in the task selection process using an identifier string as an input, is to define which positions in the string that are to be activated:

Enter the significant positions, to define which positions in the identifier string will be used for matching. The positions must be either comma-separated, or by range.

Working with the Tool Tab

A tool must be connected to the controller for the Tool menu to show information.

Tool Information

The Tool information view contains information used for giving service personnel accurate information about the tool connected to the controller, so that they can give adequate help and support, or for operators to see what tool is connected to the controller.

Tool information

Information Description

Model Tool model denomination.

Max torque The maximum torque the tool can use for a tightening.

Min speed The minimum rotation speed of the tool.

Max speed The maximum rotation speed of the tool.

Min final speed The minimum final rotation speed of the tool (only for BCP/BCV-RE tools).

Max final speed The maximum final rotation speed of the tool (only for BCP/BCV-RE tools).

Gear ratio The ratio of the angular velocity of the input gear to the angular velocity of the output gear.

Serial number The tool’s serial number may be needed when the correct version of the Product instruction is required, in order to get the correct spare parts or service instructions.

Software version Tool software version.

Product number The tool’s Product or Ordering number.

Tool TAG information

Tool TAG information is only available if the tool type is a STwrench.

STwrench tool information

Information Description

TAG id The programmable RFID TAG identification number that is programmed into the End-fitting tool (Socket).

In certain cases extensions may be needed to fit the application. In this case the wrench measurement must be compensated to show a correct value.

Torque correction coefficient

To calculate the correction coefficient, refer to the latest version of the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

The parameter is stored in the RFID TAG in the End-fitting tool.

In certain cases extensions may be needed to fit the application. In this case the wrench measurement must be compensated to show a correct value.

Angle correction coefficient

To calculate the correction coefficient, refer to the latest version of the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

The parameter is stored in the RFID TAG in the End-fitting tool.

Nominal torque The smartHEAD of the STwrench contains the torque transducer and defines the wrench’s nominal torque. For more information, refer to the latest version of the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

The correction coefficients alter the STwrench measurement. It may cause an improper reading. Before making any corrections, refer to the latest version of the STwrench User Guide (printed matter number 9836 4134 01).

Tool Connection

The tool connection area shows which virtual station the tool is connected to.

Tool Health

The Health view contains information about tool temperature.

Tool temperature

Tool temperatures (both for cabled and battery tools) are monitored continuously by the POWER FOCUS 6000. Supported temperature units are degrees Celsius (°C) and degrees Fahrenheit (°F), with Celsius being the default unit. It is possible to switch between the two units without requiring a controller restart. When the tool motor temperature or tool electronics temperature exceeds max temperature, the tool is locked and an alert (2014) is shown. The tool is once again unlocked when the tool temperature drops below the temperature limit.

Tool temperature is not available for the STwrench.

Monitoring Tool Temperature

From the display or through the web GUI, users can access the latest tool electronics and tool motor temperatures measured together with the timestamp when the measurement was taken.

1. On the Home view, tap on the Tool Tab.

1. Both tool electronics temperature and tool motor temperature are listed under Health.

For pulse tools, the Tool pulse unit temperature is also listed.

1. Click on either entry to access a list of peak temperatures and their timestamps.

Tool Maintenance

The tool stores a service interval number and counts how many tightenings can be performed before a tool maintenance, or service is needed.

Setting the Maintenance Alarm

1. On the Home view, tap on the Settings Tab, then select Tool.

1. Set the Service indicator alarm to On.

1. Return to the Home view, tap on the Tool Tab, and then select the tool you wish to set the alarm for.

1. Enter a value in the Service interval box.

When working with pulse tools, both service intervals for number of tightenings and number of pulses is set. Whichever interval is reached first will trigger the alarm.

Maintenance parameters

Field Description

Last service Date and time when last service was performed. The Last service date is set at the repair workshop. The Last service date is set to current date and time when the Reset service count button is pressed.

Total number of tightenings performed by the tool since it was used for the first time. This value is made available at service, and will remain the same until next service.

Total tightenings at service

Remaining tightenings Total number of tightenings left until the service interval is reached.

Service interval Number of tightenings to be performed between two service events. Can be set in multiples of 10 000.

Total pulses at service [pulse tools only] Total number of pulses performed by the tool since it was used for the first time. This value is made available at service, and will remain the same until next service.

Remaining pulses [pulse tools only] Total number of pulses left until the service interval is reached.

Service interval [pulse tools only] Number of pulses to be performed between two service events. Can be set in multiples of 10 000.

Reset service counter Reset of the Remaining tightenings counter and sets Last service date to current date.

Reset service data [pulse tools only] Reset of the Remaining tightenings counter as well as oil status and sets Last service date to current date.

Tool Calibration

Tool calibration is used to control how well a tool corresponds to a reference transducer.

The calibration value stored in the tool memory is used to adjust the torque value given by the tool’s torque transducer so that the correct torque value is displayed on the controller. The controller displays the date when the tool was last calibrated.

Calibration parameters

Field Description

Last calibrated Date and time when last calibration was performed.

Calibration value Torque value to calibrate against.

Next calibration date Date when the next calibration of this tool is needed.

Preparing the Calibration

1. Make sure the tool and controller are set up to perform tightening.

1. Set up the tool with a torque reference transducer (such as the STa6000, STpad or JSB Bench).

Refer to the torque reference transducer User Guide for set-up instructions.

1. Select a Tightening program with a target torque corresponding to a tightening normally used with your tool.

See Basic Tightening setup for a tutorial on setting up and activating a suitable tightening program.

Calibrating the Tool

The calibration value used for the tool is calculated from the torque readings read from the controller, and the torque reference transducer through the equation below:

New calibration value = Old calibration value × Mean (Reference values / Power Focus values)

1. On the Home view, tap on Tool Tab and select the tool to be calibrated. Then, go to Calibration.

1. Take note the old calibration value found in the Calibration value text box.

1. Make at least three tightenings and use the torque values read from the controller and the reference transducer (ACTA or

similar) for calculating the mean torque values.

1. Calculate the new calibration value using the New calibration value equation.

1. Store the new calibration value in the tool memory by entering the calculated value in the Calibration value text box and

tapping Apply.

After calibration is completed, perform a tightening to verify that the new values are correct.

Calibrating a Tool Through the STa6000 or STpad

Connecting the STa6000/STpad

The STa6000/STpad can be connected to the controller in two ways:

Connecting the STa6000

Connection Remarks

COM port Connect the Atlas Copco USB to Serial adapter to the controller's USB port using the ACTA Serial cable. Connect the STa6000 to the Serial Adapter using a USB cable.

Ethernet port Connect the ethernet cable between the STa6000 and the controller's Factory Ethernet port, or the factory network.

Connecting the STpad

Connection Remarks

COM port Connect the STpad to the Controller's COM port using the ACTA Serial cable.

Ethernet port Connect the ethernet cable between the STa6000 and the controller's Factory Ethernet port, or the factory network.

Performing the QA Calibration through the STa6000 or STpad

1. Make sure the tool is connected and assigned to a virtual station on the controller.

Single tightening programs cannot be used for calibration purposes. Make sure a batch program is selected.

1. On the Home view, tap on Tool Tab. Then click on QA Calibration, and set the QA Calibration to On.

1. Select the virtual station the tool to be calibrated is connected to, and select the connection type to be used (TCP of COM port).

1. Connect the STa6000/STpad to the controller, and select the correct virtual station.

1. Start the calibration from the STa6000/STpad.

The STa6000/STpad requests controller information, including tool information and tightening program.

1. Execute the tightening. When the calibration device detects a tightening, it requests the tightening result from the controller.

1. Repeat the above step until all tightenings in the batch have been executed.

Once completed, the STa6000/STpad creates a report, as well as calculate a new calibration value for the tool.

1. Select Store in the STa6000/STpad to send the new calibration value to the controller, which in turn writes it to the tool.

During calibration, if the tightening program is changed, or the sequence/batch is updated, the calibration is terminated.

There is no limit in the batch size used for calibration purposes. However, the STa6000 can only display two digits as batch size. Thus, the counter on the Sta6000 reads 00 for 100.

After calibration is completed, perform a tightening to verify that the new values are correct.

Tool Motor Tuning

A motor tuning adjusts the tool’s motor control unit to optimize the performance and minimize loss.

For cable tools a motor tuning should be performed on each specific combination of controller and tool together. STB tools can be moved to another controller without the need to perform a new motor tuning.

Before performing the motor tuning, make sure the tool is connected to a virtual station and that the controller is set up to perform tightening.

The motor tuning takes approximately 1 minute to perform and rotates the spindle in both clockwise (CW) and counterclockwise (CCW) directions before it is finished.

For tools configured with open end Gear Front Attachment (GFA), remove the open end extension from the tool before performing the motor tuning.

Performing tool motor tuning

1. On the Home view, select the Tool Tab. Then, select the tool to be motor tuned and go to Motor tuning.

1. Select Perform, and then press the trigger on the tool.

1. Select OK to start the Motor tuning.

Follow the instructions on the screen and keep pressing the tool trigger until the motor tuning is done.

If the motor tuning is successful, an OK event is displayed.

If the motor tuning is not successful, or the tool trigger was released before the motor tuning is done, an NOK event is displayed.

Open End Tuning

The open end tuning function is available for tools configured with open end Gear Front Attachment (GFA). The function calculates the true gear ratio of both the tool and the extension combined, and saves it to the tool. The tuning takes approximately 2 minutes to perform.

When the open end tuning is completed, the tool must be calibrated with the open end extension attached.

Performing open end tuning

1. On the Home view, select the Tool Tab. Then, select the tool to be tuned and go toOpen End Tuning.

1. Select Perform, and then press the trigger on the tool.

1. Follow the instructions on the screen and keep pressing the tool trigger until the open end tuning is done.

If the open end tuning is successful, an OK event is displayed.

If the open end tuning is not successful, or the tool trigger is released before the tuning is done, an NOK event is displayed.

WLAN and Bluetooth for Wireless Tools

The POWER FOCUS 6000 controller has built-in wireless LAN and Bluetooth radio modules that enable the connection of wireless tools to a controller using a pairing process. When the pairing is established, the tool will connect to the controller automatically as soon as the tool is in range of the controller. A tool paired with a controller is only able to connect to that specific controller even if another controller is set up to use the same radio channel.

The WLAN radio module in the controller can connect to three tools at a time, while the Bluetooth module allows for six simultaneous connections.

Pairing mode for STB tool and STwrench

Placing the STB Tool in Pairing Mode

1. Disconnect the (charged) battery from the tool.

1. Press the tool trigger while re-attaching the battery.

1. When the tool LEDs are off, release the tool trigger.

1. When the tool LEDs are on again, press the tool trigger.

1. When the tool LEDs are off again, release the tool trigger. Both LEDs start to flash (after approximately 10 seconds).

1. The tool is now in pairing mode. The LEDs keep flashing when the tool is in pairing mode.

Do not start the Power Focus pairing procedure before both LEDs on the tool are flashing. Initiate pairing within 30 seconds or the tool might time out.

When the tool is placed in pairing mode, tap the connection type to start the pairing process.

Placing the STwrench in pairing mode

1. Turn on the STwrench.

1. During the cell and gyroscope adjustment, press the UP, RIGHT and BARCODE buttons on the STwrench keyboard in that order.

1. At the end of the zero adjustment, the wrench is in pairing mode.

When the tool is placed in pairing mode, tap the connection type to start the pairing process.

Bluetooth Requirements

In order to use Bluetooth with the POWER FOCUS 6000, the following requirements need to be met:

POWER FOCUS 6000 software 2.6 or higher

A wireless tool equipped with a Bluetooth module

Tool software boot version 9.1.6 or higher

Tool software app version 3.6.1 or higher

Wireless Tools Restrictions

When all WLAN (3) or Bluetooth slots (6) are filled, additional wireless tools paired with the controller will replace existing paired tools. There are a few rules governing this replacement.

In the case of WLAN, one of the previously paired tools will be replaced at random.

In the case of Bluetooth, offline tools will be replaced first, followed by online tools. Tools linked to a Virtual Station will never be replaced. When pairing an additional Bluetooth-equipped tool to a controller that already has six wireless Bluetiooth tools linked to Virtual Stations, make sure to remove one of the paired tools from one of the Virtual Stations before pairing the additional tool. The tool disconnected from the Virtual Station will then be replaced by the new tool.

Pairing a Wireless Tool to a Controller

The pairing of a Mechatronic Wrench to a controller is done differently than other wireless tools, and requires an MWRKit to be connected to the controller. Please refer to the tool's Product Instructions for more detailed information.

Before you start the pairing process:

Make sure WLAN or Bluetooth is enabled in the Controller (Depending on the wireless tool you want to pair)

Make sure there are pairing slots available (3 for WLAN and 6 for Bluetooth)

Check which radio channel to use

Check how to put the tool into pairing mode. See the STB user guide (9836 3043 01) for instructions on how to do this, or follow the instructions below

If possible, have a clear line of sight between tool and controller

Make sure no other tools are being paired with the controller at the same time

1. Enable the internal WLAN by going to the Settings > WLAN. Drag the Enabled switch to On

If the WLAN Enabled switch is set to Off it is not possible to pair a tool to the controller. Tools already connected to the internal WLAN are disconnected when the Enabled switch is set to Off.

1. Set the radio channel to be used with the wireless tool. On the Home view, tap on Settings Tab, and click WLAN.

1. In the Radio channel area, tap the channel list and choose the appropriate channel.

Changing the channel will permanently disconnect all wireless tools paired with the controller.

1. Return to the Home view, and tap on Tool Tab. Then, tap the pairing icon in the upper right corner.

1. Put the tool in pairing mode. See Putting the wireless tool into pairing mode.

1. In the Pairing dialog box, click Perform to start the pairing process.

1. The pairing process will end with one of the following results:

Pairing successful - The tool has been paired to the controller using the selected channel.

Pairing unsuccessful - This can be due to any of the following reasons:

No tool detected during the pairing process. Make sure the tool is in range and in pairing mode, and then click Close and try again.

More than one tool was found during the pairing process. Make sure no other tool is in pairing mode, and then click Close and try again.

Pairing already in progress. Make sure no one else is performing the pairing process on the controller, and then click Close and try again.

Pairing failed. Click Close and try again.

An IRC-W Infrastructure tool is a tool that is using the factory's wireless infrastructure to connect to the controller. The tool configurations, ADHOC or Infrastructure Mode, are set in ToolsTalk Service 2. A tool configured as an IRC-W Infrastructure tool can also connect as an ADHOC connected tool, using the controllers own built-in network. But when the tool restarts, it will revert to an IRC-W Infrastructure configured tool.

Connecting BCP/BCV-RE Tools

The process for connecting BCV and BCP tools to the controller is slightly different than for other types of tools.

1. On the Home view, tap on the Settings Tab. Then, select BCP/BCV-RE Connections.

1. Add a new BCP/BCV-RE Connection configuration by clicking on the Plus (+) icon top right.

1. Turn on the configuration and provide a name in the name field.

1. Fill in the Server port and the Server host of the tool you want to connect in the respective fields. You can find both of these in

the tool's Loader Software.

The tool should now be connected to the controller. Assign it to a Virtual Station in order to use it with a tightening program.

Working with the Virtual Station Tab

Virtual stations are configured in the Virtual Station menu.

A virtual station is a software abstraction of a physical station and can be set up to use a specific tool and remotely execute different tasks using the tool.

In POWER FOCUS 6000, it is possible to set up a number of virtual stations per controller. Each virtual station can be connected to one tool and one or more accessories.

When configuring different tools, make sure the selected start signal in Start source matches the selected tool and that the selected task can be run on the specific tool.

Before any tightening can begin a task must be selected in the virtual stations menu. A task is of one of three types:

Tightening program

Batch sequence

Sources

The selection can be made manually by the operator or by external signals.

Product Essentials Tutorials

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ay0zO5fGSD8

Creating a Virtual Station

Controller features, such as the Low Reaction Tightening Strategies and controller-wide functions among others, require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the controller. Please refer to Licenses (FMS) for more detailed information on licenses.

Create a virtual station

To create a new virtual station:

1. Tap on the plus sign.

1. Edit the name and other parameters.

To remove a virtual station: Tap on delete at the bottom of the list of parameters.

The list of virtual stations created is presented in the order of creation.

If no tool configuration is available when assigning a tool, a new tool configuration is automatically created and assigned to the virtual station.

This auto-created tools configuration will have Start source set to Trigger only and trace set to Off. For STB tools Start request will be set to On.

Assigning Licenses to a Virtual Station

To make virtual stations working, it is needed to assign them a Virtual Station Type license.

1. Select the Virtual Station menu and select the virtual station you want to assign licenses to.

1. In the Licenses section, select the arrow in the Virtual station type field

The Change License Type window appears.

1. Select the Virtual Station Type you want to assign to the virtual station.

1. [If additional Virtual Station Features need to be assigned] Select Edit in the Features field.

The Select Features window appears.

1. Check all features you want to assign to the virtual station, then select OK.

Unassigning licenses from a Virtual Station

1. Select the Virtual Station menu, then select the virtual station you want to unassign licenses from.

1. In the Licenses section, select the name of the license in the Virtual Station Type field.

The Change License Type window appears.

1. Select the name of the assigned Virtual Station Type you want to unassign.

The Change License Type closes and the Virtual Station Type field will say None. All features will be removed from the controller as well.

When a Virtual Station is deleted, the licenses associated with that Virtual Station will automatically be returned to the Pool.

Connecting a Tool to a Virtual Station

A virtual station can only have one tool connected. Just one of the tools connected to a controller can be a cable tool. Added virtual stations can connect wireless tools paired to the controller.

Each virtual station needs to have one tool configuration, in addition to the tool. The tool configurations are created in the Configurations menu.

1. Go to the Virtual station menu and tap the virtual station you want to connect the tool to.

1. In the Tool area, tap Choose tool to open the list of available tools.

Or, if a tool is already chosen, tap Change tool to open the list of tools available to change to.

1. In the list of available tools, tap the desired tool to connect it to the virtual station.

Tools not available will be greyed out. To connect such a tool, it must first be disconnected from its virtual station.

1. When connecting a new tool a tool configuration is attached. If there are more than one configuration available a list of tool

configurations is shown.

1. To replace the tool configuration for the virtual station:

Click on the arrow beside the name of the current configuration.

Choose another of the configurations in the list.

It is not possible to deselect a configuration, only to select another available configuration.

Configuring Task Window in a Virtual Station

The selected task can either be running a tightening program, running a batch sequence or enabling the task using a source configured in the Sources menu.

The task can be monitored from the controller and the result of the task can be presented together with any events that may have occurred during the operation.

Configuring Manual Mode in a Virtual Station

Manual mode for Virtual stations is used for performing tasks while the tool is in locked mode. In cases where the tool is locked for a certain reason (e.g. because the tool is outside its TLS footprint) there still may be a need to perform certain tasks with the tool, such as performing emergency work. By configuring manual mode for the virtual station, users can determine what signals are sent when entering manual mode (Entering signals), what task can be performed while in manual mode (Secondary task), and what signals are sent when leaving manual mode (Leaving signals).

Since desired scenarios can vary between different users (i.e. which signals to send upon entry and exit and what task to perform), manual mode is fully configurable for each virtual station.

1. Go to the Virtual station menu and click on the virtual station to configure, then under Task, click on Set manual mode

1. In the Manual mode configuration screen, set the secondary task. This determines which task shall be run when in manual

mode.

If no secondary task is set, the primary task will be used during manual mode.

All task types (tightening, batch sequence, source) can be set for the secondary task as for the primary task.

1. Set the entering signals to be sent by clicking the plus icon at the bottom of the Entering section. See the parameters for

entering signals below.

1. Set the leaving signals to be sent by clicking the plus icon at the bottom of the Leaving section. See the parameters for leaving

signals below.

There is a limit of 99 signals that can be set for entering and leaving.

Entering and Leaving Signals

The parameters for entering and leaving signals are the same.

There are two types of signals: Boolean and integer/string type. For Boolean type signals, an on/off (true/false) switch is used. For integer/string type signals, a text field is used where the (I/O) signal or string can be indicated.

Signal Type Default value

Abort sequence Boolean Off

Acknowledge events Boolean Off

Activate tool scanner Boolean Off

Signal Type Default value

Clear results Boolean Off

Disable Fieldbus Boolean Off

Disable Open Protocol Commands Boolean Off

Disable Tool scanner Boolean Off

External monitored [1-8] Boolean Off

Flash Tool Green Led (external protocol) Boolean Off

Id for dynamic batch size Integer 0

Reset batch Boolean Off

Reset batch sequence Boolean Off

Reset bistable relay Boolean Off

Reset Too Many NOK Boolean Off

Set bistable relay Boolean Off

Unlock tool on complete Boolean Off

Unlock tool on disable Boolean Off

Configuring Protocols Window in a Virtual Station

Under the tab Protocols, in the Virtual Station menu, you'll find a list of available communication protocols depending on the current license in use. The Open Protocol is available for all licenses.

To gain access to functionality through Open Protocol, a unique port for each Virtual Station needs to be defined.

1. Set the Open Protocol switch to On.

1. Enter the Server port number.

1. Enter the PLC Index value between 1 to 6.

PLC Index is used to map where in the shared memory the Open Protocol commands are to be written. The default value is 1 but it is possible to enter values 1 to 6

1. Choose the action to be applied when the connection to the client is lost.

The Disconnect setting controls the action applied when a connection error occurs:

None - The tightening program continues normally.

Lock tool - The tool is locked after finishing the current tightening normally.

Unassign task - The tightening is aborted after finishing the ongoing task. Except for plain tightening programs or Batch sequences where the task will be removed after finishing.

Always lock tool - The tool is locked after finishing the current tightening, regardless of result.

1. Use legacy counter

The legacy counter setting counts all tightenings in a sequence and outputs that number to secondary systems. To enable this setting, set Use legacy counter to Yes.

1. MID2500 loosening program

This setting allows for the selection of a MID2500 loosening program from the list.

1. Tap or select Apply when ready.

As the default value for SoftPLC Index is always 1 and no checks are made to see if it is in use, there is a possibility that you may have configured the system so that the same index is configured several times when adding Virtual stations. In this case, the Soft PLC will not be able to determine from which Virtual Station the incoming MID is originating from.

Configuring Accessories Window in a Virtual Station

For connecting and disconnecting QIF accessories to and from a virtual station, see Connecting QIF accessories to a virtual station and Connecting QIF accessories to a virtual station.

For troubleshooting with the help of I/O diagnostics of an accessory, see Digital Signal Diagnostics.

Digital Signal Diagnostics

During deployment and during troubleshooting of a controller, a diagnostic tool is very helpful. It is available for the analysis under the Info tag for a device configuration or a fieldbus mapping in the Virtual station menu.

The controller can operate in normal mode or in diagnostics mode. In normal mode the digital input and output signals operate normally and are routed between the internal controller logic and to an external accessory or a connector.

The diagnostics mode is divided into monitor mode and forced mode. In the monitor mode signals operate normally, but provide live monitoring of the signal behavior. In forced mode the connection between the controller internal logic and the external accessory is opened and the input and output signals can be forced to a desired state.

It is possible to diagnose digital signals for one device or one fieldbus at a time.

Diagnostics Configuration

Diagnostics for a specific accessory or fieldbus is accessible through the Info option in the Virtual Station view for the accessory or fieldbus.

1. Tap Info and on the next screen tap Diagnostics.

1. Activate Monitor mode or Forced mode with the switch.

1. The statuses of input signals and output signals are available under the respective tabs.

It is only possible to access the diagnostics from one single user or function at a time. If the diagnostics is already in use an information message is shown on the screen.

Normal Operations

In normal operations mode external input signals are passed to the internal controller logic and controller output signals are passed to an external target, without any intervention from the diagnostics module.

A Controller internal state machine and logic functions

B Digital output signal path

C Digital input signal path

D Diagnostics module

Monitor Digital Signals

In the diagnostics mode all signals passed to and from the controller internal logic can be monitored. A signal tap is connected in the diagnostics module and the signal states are displayed on the web GUI or the controller GUI.

A Controller internal state machine and logic functions

B Digital output signal path

C Digital input signal path

D Diagnostics module

E User interface

F Output signal tap

G Input signal tap

Force Digital Signals

In the diagnostics mode all signals passed to and from the controller internal logic can be forced to a desired state. The signal lines are opened in the diagnostics module. From the user interface both input and output signals can be forced to steady states. The user interface is either the web GUI or the controller GUI.

While signals are forced, the controller operates normally. When leaving the diagnostics mode and the forced mode all signals are set to the current operating state of the controller. This may lead to a change-of-state for digital outputs, which can create unwanted actions.

A Controller internal state machine and logic functions

B Digital output signal path

C Digital input signal path

D Diagnostics module

E User interface

F Forced output signal insertion point

G Forced input signal insertion point

Configuring Fieldbus Window in a Virtual Station

The Fieldbus entry in the GUI shows the fieldbus mapping assigned to the controller.

To analyze the fieldbus configuration click on perform in the diagnostics field for the fieldbus mapping. Read more about the diagnostics tool in the Virtual station - Accessories section of this chapter.

To configure Fieldbus mappings, ToolsTalk 2 is required.

Virtual station - Fieldbus

Working with the Configurations Tab

Tool Configuration

In Configurations >Tool configuration menu it is possible to configure the available accessory functions on the tool.

Different functions are available depending on the tool type.

Configuring Accessory Functions on the Tool

1. Select Filter by tool type. Then, select the necessary tool.

1. Select Edit to configure the necessary functions.

A configuration assigned to a virtual station cannot be deleted.

1. If available, configure Tool LEDs, Function button, Buzzer and Direction switch by selecting the related box.

Each box shows a number which corresponds to the number of the specific function (for example, 1 corresponds to Tool LEDs, 2 to Function button, 3 to Buzzer, and 4 to Direction switch).

1. If available, configure the General settings, Start condition, and Accessory bus according to the customer needs.

General settings

The general settings for the tool can be set in the General settings section.

Default value

Parameter Description

Inactivity timeout Determines if the tool turns the power off after a set period of inactivity, or not. On

If Inactivity timeout is set to On, it sets the number of minutes before the shutdown. 120 min

Front LED Sets the behavior of the front LED (above tool trigger). Available only for wireless tools. When it is set to Off, the front LED does not lit when the trigger is pressed.

On

Duration after trigger released

Sets how long the front LED stays lit after the tool trigger is released (in seconds).

0 sec

For cable tools, the front LED stays lit for 10 seconds after the tools trigger is pressed.

Off

Trace Enables the graphical representation of the tightening.

For multistep programs, trace is always on from Trigger pressed.

For wireless tools, select Trigger pressed or Rundown complete for making the trace.

Off

TAG check Enables TAG checking on the tool. The tool locks if the TAG supplied with the program is not equal to the one inserted into the STwrench smartHEAD.

TAG check is available only for STwrench or when no tool is selected when validating the tool configuration.

Off

TAG selection It is used for selecting a Tightening Program/Batch or Batch Sequence by using Batch Sequence/Source Tightening/Source Batch. The Tightening Program/Batch or Batch Sequence has a TAG number configured that corresponds to the TAG number of the TAG inserted into the STwrench smartHEAD. On the STwrench display, the operator is informed about which Tightening Program/Batch or Batch Sequence is selected for the TAG inserted into the STwrench smartHEAD.

TAG selection is available only for STwrench or when no tool is selected when validating the tool configuration.

Configuration of the Tool LEDs

The different LED indicators on the tool are configured to be controlled by one of the available output signals.

Blue LED

The blue LED will be lit for a configurable duration of time, or configured to be lit until the following tightening. It is lit on the signal chosen by the configuration.

Result indicator

The result indicator decides how and for how long the LEDs are lit on tightening results. A pre-configured pattern is selected from a shortcut menu. This pattern can be a combination of tightening results.

Result indicator signals

Signal Description

Off No LEDs are activated after the tightening, regardless of the result

Green If a result indicator is selected, a green light is the default signal if the tightening is terminated correctly (OK).

Red:high:yellow:low If the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK); a red LED indicates that the final value is too high, or a yellow LED indicates that the value is too low. Red and yellow can be lit simultaneously (e.g. in case of too high torque, and too low angle).

Red:high(prio):yellow:low If the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK); a red LED indicates that the final value is too high, or a yellow LED indicates that the value is too low. Red and

yellow cannot be lit simultaneously. Only red is lit in case of simultaneous high and low values.

Red:NOK:yellow:low A red LED indicates that the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK). An additional yellow LED can indicate if the value is too low.

Red:NOK A red LED indicates that the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK). No additional LEDs are shown.

LED ring

The LED ring decides how the LEDs behave between the tightenings. The LED ring consists of three circles of LED lamps. One circle of red LEDs, one circle of yellow LEDs and one circle of green LEDs. Each circle can have a steady signal or a flashing signal. This provides a total of six different signals that can be connected to the LED ring.

A LED is turned on only when no tightening is ongoing and when the controlling output signal is activated.

A LED is turned off when the maximum time is exceeded. Only applicable if the signal type is an Event.

A LED is turned off when the next tightening is started.

A LED is turned off when the controlling output signal is deactivated. Only applicable if the signal type is an State.

Configuration of the Function Button

Use the function button on the tool to control up to six of the available input signals. The button’s three possible condition states are combined with the two possible states of the direction switch.

Function button states Direction switch states

Single push CW

Single push CCW

Double push CW

Double push CCW

Pressed CW

Pressed CCW

Two configurable parameters controls the push time.

Default value

Parameter Description

Push detection interval

For single push: the maximum push time (in milliseconds) between the button being pressed and the button being released. 300 ms

Next push interval For double push: the maximum time (in milliseconds) between the button being released after the first push, and the buttong being pressed again.

300 ms

Configuration of the Buzzer

The buzzer is configured by assigning a sound to a signal selected from a list of available signals.

The sound consists of a set of parameters described in the table. A signal with a sound can be prioritized between 1 and 10 where 1 is highest priority and 10 the lowest. By default a signal and sound has the priority 5. Up to 20 sounds can be assigned to signals.

Parameter Description

Frequency Exact frequency in Hz.

Time on Time (in ms) that the buzzer makes a sound.

Time off Time (in ms) that the buzzer is quiet.

Repetition Number of times the buzzer repeats the on/off sequence.

Volume The buzzer volume, in percentage of max volume.

Configuration of the Direction Switch

The direction switch on the tool can be configured to trigger certain input signals when switched quickly (with a duration of 500 ms) from clockwise (CW) to counter clockwise (CCW) and back, or vice versa.

Systems in Remote start

When the system uses remote start and the user wants to trigger a signal assigned to a direction switch in Tool configuration, one needs to assign the respective signal and use the signal 10029 - Select Loosening with a required duration of 500 ms to trigger it. For this to work, an extra configuration step in ToolsTalk is needed. Under Hardware configuration in ToolsTalk, a configuration must be set for the tool by clicking on the tool icon.

Configuration of the Start Condition

The start conditions for a tool, such as start request, start source, trace, and TAG conditions for STwrench are configured here. The functions are described in the respective sections.

Start Request

Start request enables the requirement of having a persistent connection between the tool and controller for an STB tool. This to make sure that the tool is always up to date with tightening program or batch settings, and with other settings on the controller, when performing tightening.

When Start request is set to On the tool gets locked if the tool loose connection with the controller. This means that if the tool loses connection in the middle of a tightening or a batch sequence, the tool will finish the ongoing tightening and then stop. The tool will be locked until it has reestablished the connection.

Parameters available for the start request

Parameter Description Default value

Start request Lock the tool when the tool loose connection with the controller.

On

On: The tool is locked from performing tightening if it loose connection with the controller..

Off: The tool can continue to perform tightening although it has lost connection with the controller.

Start Source

Use the tool start source to set how to start the tool. The default value is Trigger only.

Start Source is available only for certain tool types.

Options for start source

Start source Description

Trigger only Press the tool trigger to start the tightening.

Trigger OR Push Press the tool trigger or push the tool against the joint to start the tightening.

Trigger AND Push Press the tool trigger and push the tool against the joint to start the tightening.

Push only Push the tool against the joint to start the tightening.

Digital input Have a signal using digital input to trigger the start of the tightening.

Safety trigger Two triggers (as with trigger and push) activated within 500 ms from each other to start the tightening.

Trace Configuration

Traces provide users with a graphical representation of the tightening. Traces can begin either from when the trigger is pressed or from after rundown complete.

Parameter Description Default value

Off

Trace Enables the result to be viewed in graphic form.

Off: No trace is made.

Trigger pressed: The trace is drawn from when the tool trigger is pressed.

Rundown complete: The trace is drawn from when Rundown complete is reached.

The maximum number of trace points is 2000 (200 for STB tools). If the maximum number of trace points is exceeded, every other result will be erased (effectively halving the sampling rate). Tracing will continue as long as the tightening is active, and every time the maximum number of trace points is reached, half of the trace points will be erased to allow the tracing to continue. Tracing will stop when the final stage of the tightening has finished.

TAG Check

TAG check feature enables TAG checking on the tool. When the TAG check is enabled both on the Power Focus 6000 and the STwrench, the tool locks if the TAG supplied with the program is not equal to the one inserted into the STwrench smartHEAD.

The TAG number is specified differently, depending on the work task.

In case of Generic Tightening Strategies, the TAG number is specified in the Tightening Program.

In case of Multistep Tightening Strategy, the TAG number depends on what has been selected in Sources/Batch Sequence menu.

If running Source Tightening (Sources > Tightening > Source Tightening > Selector mode - Confirm), the TAG number is specified in the Socket box.

If running Batch Sequence (Batch sequence > Sequence library > Sequence > Batch configuration - Edit), the TAG number is the Identifier Number.

If running Source Batch (Sources > Batch sequence > Source Batch), the TAG number is specified in the Batch Sequence as per above section.

In case of Batch Sequence and Source Batch, set Free order - in the Batch Sequence - to No.

TAG check is available only for STwrench.

TAG check options Description

Off The tool does not lock, regardless of the inserted TAG.

On The tool is locked as long as the TAG number is not equal to the TAG number specified in the tightening strategy configuration.

TAG Selection

TAG selection feature is used for selecting a Tightening Program/Batch or Batch Sequence that has a TAG number configured that corresponds to the TAG number of the TAG inserted into the STwrench smartHEAD.

TAG selection is available only for STwrench.

TAG selection options Description

Off The STwrench does not signal the controller to select Tightening Program/Batch or Batch Sequence.

On Select the Tightening Program/Batch or Batch Sequence according to the TAG number configured in the Batch Sequence/Source Tightening/Source Batch.

Configuration of the Accessory Bus

Tool accessories are connected to the tool through the accessory bus. The tool accessories are configured separately for each tool configuration on the controller.

Accessory bus configurations

Type Description

ST selector A small display and buttons used to select tasks or programs according to the configuration.

TLS tag Tool Location System tag used to provide output signaling to the operator.

EHMI A small display and buttons used to select tasks or programs according to the configuration.

ST Selector

The ST selector is a tool accessory. It is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. It has a small display, two input buttons and output LEDs.

Display

The display shows one information at a time and has four different pages that can be configured to display different preset items on every page.

Parameter Description

Page 1 Select the mesage to be displayed from the list:.

Final torque

Final angle

Batch count

Remaining batch

Selected tightening program

Selected batch sequence id

Target torque

Target/Final torque

Switch time

Parameter Description

Switch time Select the time to display one message before the next message is displayed.

Buttons

The two buttons can be configured to act upon the displayed information and used to step through listed items.

Parameter Description

Left button Select one action from the shortcut menu.

Right button Select one action from the shortcut menu.

Status LEDs

The status LEDs can be activated or deactivated.

Parameter Description

Enable result LEDs Select the desired On or Off radio button.

Enable extra LEDs Select the desired On or Off radio button.

The result LEDs are red, green and yellow, and show the same information as the main tool LEDs.

The two extra LEDs can show Batch OK and Batch sequence OK. Both these LEDs are turned off at the next tightening.

TLS Tag

The Tool Location System (TLS) tag, is a tool accessory. The TLS tag is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. The TLS tag is part of the Ubisense positioning system and is handled independently from the controller. In addition to the positioning, the TLS tag can be used to provide information to the operator. Selected output signals can generate different LED light combinations.

Up to 10 different output signals can be mapped to a light priority.

TLS tag configuration parameters

Parameter Description

Signal Select a signal to trigger the LED light from a shortcut menu.

For a signal of the type Event, select the duration of the signal.

Color Select a color for the LED.

Priority 10 priority levels are available for the sounds where one (1) is the highest priority level. Default priority level is five (5).

For two simultaneous signals, the signal with the highest priority wins. When two signals with the same priority triggers the LED, the first arriving signal wins.

An output signal can be of type Event or of type State.

A state signal is active as long as the state is active.

An event signal is active during a configurable time.

EHMI

The EHMI is a tool accessory. It is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. It has a graphical display, three function buttons, and optionally a scanner. The display is a subset of the controller GUI with the possibility to select tightening programs, batch sequences, and to view results from tightenings. The interaction with the controller is through function buttons.

In the EHMI configuration it is possible to decide if the function buttons are On or Off.

EHMI buttons

Parameter Description

Enable function buttons On = The buttons have full functionality to configure settings within the visible menus.

Off = The function buttons can only be used to acknowledge a necessary dialog on the EHMI.

Digital Signals

Input Signals

Input signals are system commands that are carried out by using for example buttons or switches on an accessory, either a tool accessory or a QIF accessory, or by connecting the signal to an I/O input plug.

The input signal Lock tool must not be configured for more than one accessory for each virtual station.

Output Signals

Output signals are states or events of the system. They can be linked to either a tool accessory or a QIF accessory.

Triggering Manual Mode

Manual mode can be activated by a switch or an external system. For example (indicated below), a button on an operator panel can be configured to activate manual mode.

1. Go to the Configurations menu and choose Operator panel in the left navigation.

1. If no configuration for an operator panel exists, click the plus icon at the top right of the work space, otherwise continue to the

next step.

1. In the configuration you want to alter, click Edit.

1. In the Operator panel configuration window, click on the position [A,B,C,D,E,F,G,I] to configure.

1. In the Position configuration window, click on the Component list. In the list, click One way key switch.

1. Click on the Turn signal list. In the list, choose Manual mode (use the arrow buttons to navigate within the list if necessary).

1. Close the Position configuration window.

If the user needs to be notified that Manual mode has been entered or left, then events 4070 and 4071 have to be configured, respectively.

Selector Configuration

Digital Input Information

Information about the connected digital inputs can be found by tapping Tightening and then Digital inputs on the Sources menu.

Socket Selector Configuration

Socket selector is a socket tray with LEDs that can be used to guide the user through, for example, a Batch sequence. When using more than one tightening program, it is convenient to use a selector. When a socket is lifted, the corresponding tightening program is selected. Several socket selectors can be connected to each virtual station.

Information about the connected socket selectors can be found by tapping Tightening and then Socket selector on the Sources menu.

Configuring the Socket Selector

1. Go to Configurations, then Socket selector and click on the plus at the top right to create a new configuration

1. Give the configuration a name

1. Click on Edit

1. Click Add or Remove for the correct number of socket slots, then select all the slots that need to be active (indicated in blue)

Connecting a Socket Selector to a Virtual Station

1. On the Virtual station menu, go to the virtual station to use and then go to Accessories and tap Choose accessories.

1. Under Accessories, click Choose accessories, then navigate to the Socket selector tab.

1. In the Configuration column (left), select a configuration you want to use with the socket selector (see Configuring the Socket

Selector)

1. In the Connected accessories column (right), select the socket selector you want to use.

Setting up a Socket Selector via I/o Bus

1. Connect the socket selector to the controller's I/O bus.

1. Under Virtual station > Accessories > Choose accessories > Socket selector, check that the selector shows up in the

Connected accessories column (right)

Setting up a Selector 6 via Ethernet Cable/Wireless

Selector 6 main overview

Selector front view

A Holder for socket or bit

B Indicator LEDs for the position

C Sticker area

D Mounting holes in each corner

E Service port

F Battery status LED (only available on wireless versions)

G WLAN status LED (available on some selectors)

H Battery (only available on wireless versions)

I Mobility module (only available on wireless versions)

Selector 6 connection overview

Selector bottom view

A Connector cover

B External DC power in; Kycon (DC DIN) connector

C Ethernet in, upstream connection; M12 D-coded female connector

D Selector back side

E Digital input and output connector

F Ethernet out, downstream connection; M12 D-coded female connector

G Battery

Selector 6 service port overview

Service interface

A RJ45 Service port

B RBU slot

C Function button

General set-up

1. On the controller, go to Settings > Network and under Factory Ethernet port, check the IP address (only required when setting

up via wireless connection).

1. Open the service port cover on the selector. The cover is secured by a 2 mm allen screw.

1. Connect an ethernet cable between a PC and the RJ-45 connector in the service interface.

1. Make sure the selector powered, either by PoE, by external power supply or by battery.

1. Open a web browser window in the PC.

1. Type the web address 169.251.1.1 and press the Enter key. The web server in the selector will respond and show the selector

web interface.

in the left navigation (this is selected by default). The Settings workspace shows the configuration menus and is divided into five different settings: Basic settings, Service port, Ethernet in, WLAN, and the POWER FOCUS 6000.

1. Select Settings

1. In the Ethernet in section, select External mode On or Off for the desired LED control source.

1. The next steps in the set-up depend on how the socket selector will be connected to the controller (Ethernet cable directly to

the controller (default), Ethernet cable to factory network, or wireless to factory network). See the instructions below for your set-up.

Setting up socket selector - Ethernet wired to controller (default)

1. Ethernet ports (RJ45) for connecting devices and daisy-chaining controllers are only available in newer PF6 models. In order to connect Selector 6 via Ethernet cable to older controller models, an adapter cable should be used to connect the Ethernet cable to the controllers COM PORT.

1. In the Ethernet In section, select PF6000 (default) in the Connected to drop-down.

1. Click the Save button in top right of the workspace.

1. Remove the ethernet cable from the service port.

1. Close the service port with the lid and secure it with the allen screw.

The socket selector shows up in the Connected accessories list (Virtual station > Accessories > Choose accessories > Socket selector)

Setting up Selector - wired to factory network

1. In the Ethernet In section, select Factory net from the Connected to drop-down

1. Select DHCP On or Off for dynamic or static IP address configuration. If a static IP address is required, in the IP address field,

enter the IP address for the socket selector.

1. In the PF6000 section, enter the controller IP address (see above) for the controller the selector will be connected to.

1. Click the Save button in top right of the workspace.

1. Remove the ethernet cable from the service port.

1. Close the service port with the lid and secure it with the allen screw.

The socket selector shows up in the Connected accessories list (Virtual station > Accessories > Choose accessories > Socket selector)

Setting up socket selector - wireless to factory network

1. In the Ethernet In section, select Factory net from the Connected to drop-down

1. In the WLAN section, fill out the following parameters:

Enable: set radio button to YES

SSID: fill out the SSID name for the socket selector

Password: fill out the password for the wireless network to be connected to

Encryption type: choose the correct encryption type for the wireless network (WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK, EAP-TLS)

1. In the PF6000 section, enter the controller IP address (see above) for the controller the selector will be connected to.

1. Click the Save button in top right of the workspace.

1. Remove the ethernet cable from the service port.

1. Close the service port with the lid and secure it with the allen screw.

The socket selector shows up in the Connected accessories list (Virtual station > Accessories > Choose accessories > Socket selector)

General Virtual Station

In General Virtual Station, different specific result reporting and tightening settings can be saved. Different filters can be created, filtering out specific results. In the tightening settings, characteristics like the tool unlocking behavior can be set. These configurations can then be assigned to virtual stations.

Adding and editing a configuration

1. In the Configurations menu, click on the General Virtual Station tab, and click on the plus sign in the top right corner.

1. Give the new configuration a name and click on Edit.

1. In the Result filter for reporting window, set the switch to On for those parameters you want to include in the results. By

default, all parameters are set to On.

Turning on a result filter prevents the respective result from being sent, but the result is still shown on the controller.

The following parameters can be set in the Result filter for reporting section:

Loosening

Batch increment

Batch decrement

Reset batch

Bypass Tightening Program

Abort sequence

Reset batch sequence

1. In the Tightening Settings window, set a value for any of the parameters listed. By default, all parameters are set to Off.

The following parameters can be set in the Tightening Settings section:

Unlock tool on loosening - makes sure that the tool is locked after a NOK tightening.

Disable loosening - makes sure that an operator is not loosening a bolt that their processes do not allow to be loosened.

Disable tightening - makes sure that an operator is not tightening a bolt that their processes do not allow to be tightened.

Unlock tool on loosening options

Unlock tool on loosening Description

Off A disabled tool will remain disabled regardless of the loosening status.

On OK A disabled tool will be unlocked after an OK loosening has been performed.

Always A disabled tool will be unlocked as soon as a loosening has been performed, regardless of the loosening status.

Disable loosening options

Disable loosening Description

Off Disable loosening is Off. It is always possible to loosen a bolt.

On OK tightening Disable loosening for an OK tightening. An operator cannot loosen a bolt that was terminated with tightening OK.

On NOK tightening Disable loosening for an NOK tightening. An operator cannot loosen a bolt that was terminated with tightening NOK.

Always Disable loosening is always ON. An operator can never loosen a bolt.

Disable tightening options

Disable tightening Description

Off Disable tightening is Off. An operator can always tighten a bolt.

On OK tightening Disable tightening after an OK tightening, An operator cannot tighten another bolt if the current tightening was terminated with OK.

On NOK tightening Disable tightening after a NOK tightening. An operator cannot tighten another bolt if the current tightening was terminated with NOK.

After every tightening Disable tightening is activated after every tightening. An operator cannot tighten another bolt until the current tightening is terminated.

Allowing a disabled tool to unlock after loosening

In the general virtual station configuration assigned to the virtual station to which the tool is connected, set the Unlock tool on loosening to On OK or Always.

In order to enable the setting above, the following conditions need to be met:

The Disable loosening parameter cannot be set to Off or Always.

The Disable loosening parameter cannot be set to the same value as the Disable tightening.

The tightening program used must have loosening enabled.

When the tool is locked for either tightening or loosening due to a disable state, it can be unlocked by any of the following input signals:

Master Unlock - 10005

Unlock Tool on Disable - 10059

Unlocking a disabled tool through the input signals specified is not possible if Lock tool on loosening is set to Always.

Assigning a configuration to a virtual station

1. Go to the Virtual Station menu and select the Virtual Station you want to assign the configuration to.

1. Under General, the first General Virtual Station configuration will be chosen by default. Click on the configuration name.

1. In the pop-up window, select the desired configuration from the list. The pop-up window will be closed upon selection.

Configuring QIF Accessories

A total of 15 QIF accessories can be connected to one controller. It is possible to add several scanners to each controller.

All QIF accessories connected to the controller can be connected to the same virtual station. One of each type of accessory and multiple socket selectors.

The functions of the QIF accessory can be connected to various input and output signals.

Connecting QIF Accessories to a Virtual Station

To connect a QIF accessory to a virtual station:

To connect a QIF accessory to a virtual station:

1. Configure the accessory in the Configurations menu.

1. Connect the accessory to the controller I/O bus.

1. In the Virtual station menu, choose the virtual station and then tap Choose accessories under Accessories.

1. On the appropriate accessory tab, tap both the accessory and the configuration to connect them.

1. Connected accessories show up in All connections.

Disconnecting QIF Accessories From a Virtual Station

To disconnect a QIF accessory or a scanner from a virtual station:

1. On the Virtual station menu, choose the virtual station and then tap Choose accessories under Accessories.

1. Under All connections, tap the disconnect icon on the right to disconnect.

Configuration of the Scanner

In this menu, scanner configurations can be added. Scanners can be configured to either have scanned strings handled by the controller, or passed through to a an external system. When the scanned string is passed through, the controller does not select a task based on the string, but instead passes the string to an external device via an output signal.

Adding a scanner and enabling pass through

1. Go to Configurations > Scanner, and select the Plus sign at the top right.

1. Give the scanner configuration a name.

1. To enable pass through, select Edit, and set Pass Through Mode to On.

Scanner Configuration

A scanner is used to read a barcode string or a QR code containing information to choose the appropriate batch sequence.

The scanner is configured in the Sources tab.

The scanner reads the characters you specify and puts them together to form a string of text. This text string is matched to the pre-defined strings you have specified in the controller, and if they match, the batch sequence linked to your pre-defined string is selected.

Barcode strings of a length of up to 1024 characters can be read and they can contain characters in the positions 32-126 in the ASCII table. If the barcode contains a string longer than 1024 characters, the remaining part of the string, from position 1025 and forward, is discarded.

Configuring the Scanner

The scanner itself must be set up using a US keyboard, and the scanner will emit a carriage return character to terminate the barcode string.

Valid Scanners

For a list of scanners verified for use with the POWER FOCUS 6000 controller, contact your local Atlas Copco sales representative.

Working with the Controller Tab

The system administration tasks for the POWER FOCUS 6000 controller are handled in the Controller menu. The menu is accessed through the controller GUI, the web GUI, or the Tools Talk 2 GUI.

Intelligent Application Module

The Intelligent Application module (IAM) is a non volatile storage that is located in the controller. The storage module contains all the controller programs, configurations and results. Certain modules may also include additional loaded feature items.

For a complete list of available IAMs and their capabilities, please consult an Atlas Copco sales representative.

IAM information

Software

The version number of two versions of software available in the POWER FOCUS 6000 controller are under the Software tab.

A new software distribution can be installed either by connecting a USB flash drive containing the software to the controller’s USB port, or by using the web GUI.

The software update option is visible only when accessing the controller GUI from a PC. When a mass storage device with a valid software version is inserted in the USB port a prompt to update the software will appear.

The software update file must not be unzipped and must be stored in a folder named PFImages in the root directory on the USB flash drive.

An unexpected failure during software upgrade might lead to loss of data. Before upgrading software versions, it is recommended to take a backup of the controller configuration by exporting “All controller information”.

Updating Controller Software through USB

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the controller: the installation wizard starts automatically.

If several software versions are available on the USB flash drive, a list with the different software upgrade files is displayed.

1. Select the software upgrade file to install and follow the instructions to finish the installation.

The USB flash drive needs to have a partition available and be formatted to work for Linux. Possible formats are for example FAT or NTFS.

Manually restart all Sync Member controllers after upgrading to a new software version or downgrading from a new software version.

Updating Controller Software through Web GUI

1. On the Controller menu, go to Software, and select Software update. Then, click Browse.

1. Browse and choose the .zip file with the software and follow the instructions to complete the installation.

Manually restart all Sync Member controllers after upgrading to a new software version or downgrading from a new software version.

Activating the Software on the Controller

The controller can store two installed software versions. By using the Software activation, it is possible to choose which software version to use. Software activation can be performed either locally from the controller GUI or remotely from the web GUI.

The activation process requires a restart of the controller.

1. On the Controller menu, go to Software.

1. Swipe the Software activation switch to stored and follow the instructions.

Hardware

The Hardware tab contains Controller information, such as model designation and serial number, Health, Touch screen calibration, and information about the various electronics boards in the controller.

Health

The Health view contains information about battery status and controller temperature.

Battery status

Controller > Hardware > Health

The POWER FOCUS 6000 battery, located inside the controller's front panel serves as backup power for some system elements, such as the internal clock. The status of the battery is updated once a day, as well as at controller restart. When the battery is close to being completely depleted, a warning (3011) will be displayed. The battery shall be replaced as soon as possible when the warning pops up.

Controller temperature

Controller > Hardware > Health

Controller temperature is monitored continuously by the POWER FOCUS 6000. Supported temperature units are degrees Celsius (°C) and degrees Fahrenheit (°F), with Celsius being the default unit. It is possible to switch between the two units without requiring a restart of the controller. When the controller temperature exceeds max temperature, the drive stage is disabled and an alert (3010) is shown. The drive stage is once again enabled when the controller temperature drops below the temperature limit.

From the display or through the web GUI, users can access the latest controller temperature measured together with the timestamp when the measurement was taken.

Export/Import

The Export/Import Tab supports the user to make one of the following operations: Export, Import, and Automated backup.

The Export window supports the user to export controller configurations, settings, results, and events. In addition, it is possible to export tool logs, which can be shared with Atlas Copco Service personnel to troubleshoot problems with the tool(s).

The Import window supports the user to import controller configurations and settings.

It is only possible to have one active Export or Import at the time. Any attempt to start a new Export/Import while there is an ongoing Export/Import is rejected.

The Automated backup window supports the user to generate automatically a backup file.

It is possible to export/import data through one of the following devices:

USB flash drive (formatted and with a partition to work for Linux: possible formats are, for example, FAT or NTFS)

Web GUI

During the Export/Import process a progress bar informs the user that an export/import is ongoing. The time to perform an export/import is depending on the numbers of results, events, and log files.

Export/Import Between Controllers

Controllers may have different IAM types that could have different capabilities. A controller can export all the configurations that are applicable for the current type of IAM module.

A controller cannot import a file exported from a different type of IAM module. This is applicable also when using ToolsTalk 2.

Exporting "All Controller Information"

It is possible to export controller configuration, settings, results, and events for further processing. Part of the export is done both from the cable tool, as well as connected wireless tools.

All data included in the export is stored in a file "PFExport__.tar.gz", which includes the following files and directories:

"PFExport__Results.csv" – All available results

The results are exported in a CSV formatted text file. The latest performed result is the first in the CSV file.

It is possible to export the following result information for tightenings and loosenings:

Result Information Power Focus 6000 - Tightening Programs Power Focus 6000 - Multistep Programs StepSync

Identity number - - X

Type of tightening X X X

Virtual Station name X X X

VIN (Identifier String) X X X

Date and Time X X X

Result Information Power Focus 6000 - Tightening Programs Power Focus 6000 - Multistep Programs StepSync

Unique tool identifier X X -

Batch Sequence Name X X -

Batch Sequence Counter X X -

Batch Count X X -

Bolt name - - X

Total status - - X

Total status info - - X

Status X X X

Status info X X X

Mode Name - - X

Tightening program/Multistep Name X X X

Stopping error - X X

Errors - X X

Failing Step - X X

Channel - - X

Target Torque (Nm) X X -

Final Torque (Nm) X X X

Target Angle (deg) X X -

Start Final Angle (Nm) X X X

Final Angle (deg) X X X

Rundown Angle (deg) X - -

Residual torque correlation factor X X -

Elapsed time (s) - X X

Angle low limit (deg) X X X

Angle high limit (deg) X X X

Torque low limit (Nm) X X X

Torque high limit (Nm) X X X

Number of pulses X - -

Current at shutoff (A) X X X

TrueAngle compensation (deg) X X -

Time to rundown complete (ms) X - -

Time to final torque (ms) X - -

Target Text X X -

Step Data - X X

Selftap Torque X X X

Prevailing Torque X X X

Rundown Angle Trigger X X X

The field delimiter and number format depends on the language settings:

Language Date/time Field delimiter Number format

English (en_US) MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss , 123.456

Czech (cs) dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

German (de_DE) dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

Spanish (es_ES) dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

French (fr_FR) dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

Korean (ko_KR) yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss , 123.456

Italian (it_IT) dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

Japanese (ja_JP) yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss , 123.456

Portugese (pt_BR) Dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

Russian (ru_RU) dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

Swedish (sv_SE) yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss ; 123,456

Chinese (zh_CN) yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss , 123.456

For PF6000-StepSync, all available results are in the file named “PFExport__Results.csv.zip”.

"PFExport__Events.csv" - All available events

The following event information are exported in a CSV formatted text file:

Severity

Date

Time

Code

Description

Virtual Station that triggered the event (only exported for PF6000-Handheld)

Carrier (only exported for PF6000-StepSync)

Channel (only exported for PF6000-StepSync)

"/settings" - Settings and configurations (used by Import)

For fieldbus exported settings and configurations:

General Fieldbus configuration (including IP address)

Fieldbus configuration

Fieldbus mapping (Virtual station mapping to ProcessDataFrame)

"jsonConfigurations.zip" - Multistep Tightening and Loosening programs are exported as .json files (to be used with MID2500)

"atlas_sys_d.zip" - Logfiles from Drive application

"atlas_sys_i.zip" - Logfiles from IT application

"atlas_protocol_log.zip" – Logfiles from external protocol adapters

“ExportInfo.txt” - Text document containing information about the IAM and Controller

"atlas_plc.zip" - PLC configuration

“licenseInformation.zip” – License Information and System Capabilities

How to Export "All Controller Information"

1. On the Home view, select the Controller Tab. Then, on the left side, select the Export/Import Tab .

1. In the Export window, open the drop-down menu and select All controller information.

1. In the Export window, select Export.

At the end of the exporting process, an exporting pop-up window confirms that the export is done. A PF/IXBExport__.tar.gz file is automatically downloaded.

Exporting "Settings and Configurations"

It is possible to export only controller configurations and settings.

The exported data are stored in a compressed file identified with the IAM name and exported date and time. The data in the file include all configurations and settings of the controller, so that the export file can be imported and setup another controller with the same or newer release version. The exported data include information about the IAM and Controller, and also pre-formatted Multistep Tightening and Loosening programs to be used with the MID2500 solution.

How to Export "Settings and Configurations"

1. On the Home view, select the Controller Tab. Then, on the left side, select the Export/Import Tab .

1. In the Export window, open the drop-down menu and select Settings and configurations.

1. In the Export window, select Export.

At the end of the exporting process, an exporting pop-up window confirms that the export is done. A PFExport__.tar.gz file is automatically downloaded.

Exporting "Logs from Connected Tools"

The export of tool logs enables a service technician to share the tool log data with Atlas Copco Service personnel to troubleshoot problems with the tool(s).

It is possible to export tool logs from the following tools: STB, SRB and TBP/TBP-S.

To export the tool logs, the tool has to be connected to the controller. It is not necessary for the tool to be assigned to a Virtual Station.

All data included in the tool log export is stored in a file "PFExport__.tar.gz", which includes the following files and directories:

"atlas_tool_i.zip" – All available results

For each connected tool an individual files is created. The file format for tool log files is "tool--.log"

"ExportInfo.txt" - Text document containing information about the IAM, Controller and connected tools

How to Export "Logs from Connected Tools"

1. On the Home view, select the Controller Tab. Then, on the left side, select the Export/Import Tab .

1. In the Export window, open the drop-down menu and select Logs from connected tools.

1. In the Export window, select Export.

At the end of the exporting process, an exporting pop-up window confirms that the export is done. A PFExport__.tar.gz file is automatically downloaded.

Exporting "Results"

It is possible to export only tightening results from the controller.

How to Export "Results"

1. On the Home view, select the Controller Tab. Then, on the left side, select the Export/Import Tab .

1. In the Export window, open the drop-down menu and select Results.

1. In the Export window, select Export.

At the end of the exporting process, an exporting pop-up window confirms that the export is done. In case of a multi-spindle systems (fixtured), the exported file automatically downloaded is in a .zip format, otherwise it is in a .csv format.

Importing Controller Configurations and Settings

When users import controller configuration and settings, existing configurations and settings are replaced by the imported controller configuration and settings.

The following configurations are not imported or deselected:

Controller Network settings are not imported

Results and Events are not imported

License Assignment is not imported

Assigned task in Virtual Station/s is deselected

"jsonConfigurations.zip" (Multistep Tightening and Loosening programs) is not imported

"licenseInformation.zip" (License Information and System Capabilities) is not imported

How to Import Controller Configurations and Settings

1. On the Home view, select the Controller Tab. Then, on the left side, select the Export/Import Tab .

1. In the Import window, select Import.

An Information pop-up window confirms that all setting for tightening program, batch, accessories, and controller will be replaced with the settings of the imported file. However, settings for network, PIN, results, and events will not be imported.

Select Continue.

1. In the Import pop-up window, select Choose File. Then, select the file to be imported on the controller.

At the end of the importing process, the controller will restart automatically.

If the importing process is interrupted before it has started, or the file disappears, the user is informed and the controller has to be restarted (to assure it is in a valid state). If the importing process is interrupted, but the file is not corrupt and exist, the import can be completed.

Automated Backup

The Automated Backup window enables or disables sFTP export.

By default, Enable sFTP export switch is set to OFF. When turning ON Enable sFTP export switch, an export file is created 10 minutes after the last configuration change. If Enable sFTP export switch is set to ON on system startup, an export file is automatically created within 2-3 minutes. The export file is created within 2-3 minutes to reflect changes that might have been done before the system was shutdown.

The old Backup file is deleted before the new Backup file is available.

The data in the exported file include all configurations and settings of the controller.

The sFTP users can retrieve the exported file stored in the following directory of the system: /Export/.

A system supporting sFTP is needed.

To retrieve the file sFTP users do not need to use any password.

The username for sFTP users is as follows:

Username autoexport

StepSync

Controller features, such as the Low Reaction Tightening Strategies and controller-wide functions among others, require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the controller. Please refer to Licenses (FMS) for more detailed information on licenses.

StepSync requires ToolsTalk 2 to configure.

With the StepSync function it is possible to connect several PF6000 Controllers together and run synchronized tightenings. The first controller in the configuration is called the Sync Reference and handles all the tightening and data reporting. Up to 5 additional PF6000 controllers are then connected to the Sync Reference via a PF6000 daisy-chain cable (see Setting up StepSync (hardware) and are called Sync Members, their only function is to handle the tools.

Sync Reference

The Sync Reference controller is the brain in the system. It handles the tightening settings and all data reporting. It also handles the configuration for the complete system and the connection to ToolsTalk and ToolsNet. All accessories or fieldbuses are connected directly to the Sync Reference

Sync Member

The Sync Member controller works as a drive without extra functionality. The IT part is not running and it is not possible to connect any external accessories or protocols to a Sync Member. Each Sync Member has a channel number assigned to it. The channel number is used to identify the tool and drive within the Hardware Layout Configuration in ToolsTalk 2, as well as to select the ones that should be included in the tightening in Sync Mode, and also used for result reporting. It is also used for error events to make it possible to identify the faulty part.

Tightenings

It is only possible to run Multistep tightening programs. To be able to synchronize tightenings between each tool, synchronization points are used. At these points, the tools will wait for each other before continuing with the next step in the tightening program. A tightening program can contain up to 10 steps (not counting the synchronization points). Note that the assignment of tightening programs can only take place through ToolsTalk 2. The controller does not provide possibilities to assign tightening programs.

Licensing

The StepSync function is an FMS feature. It is only the Sync Reference that requires a license, making it possible to change any PF6000 Controller into a Sync Member without any additional licenses. The Sync Reference license is an add-on FMS controller feature.

If the Sync Reference license is removed, no tightenings can be performed in StepSync mode. If connection to the license server is lost, the license will continue to operate for 48 hours. The controller will check for a valid Sync Reference license every hour.

StepSync User Interface

The StepSync user interface is a simplified version of the regular POWER FOCUS 6000 interface. For detailed descriptions on the various interface elements, please refer to the dedicated chapters and sections in this manual describing those. Note that the user interface is only accessible on the Sync Reference.

Not all functions in the various menu items are available in the StepSync interface. The following functions are accessible and editable in the interface:

Tool: all information available.

Virtual Station: all functions accessible, except creation of new Virtual Stations, assignment of Tasks (tightening program), and assignment of tool among others.

Configurations: all functions available.

Reports: Events (view all events).

Settings: the following functions are not available:

Tightening

Wireless

Events

Diagnostics: menu specific to StepSync/Flex.

License assignment: all functions available.

Configuring StepSync

The configuration of the Sync Reference and all Sync Members needs to be completed before performing the hardware set-up.

Configuring the Sync Reference

1. Select the Controller menu, then select the StepSync tab.

1. In the StepSync section, select No Sync

The Step Sync Mode window appears.

1. Select Sync Reference

The Step Sync Mode window closes.

1. Select Apply.

The controller will reboot and boot into the StepSync configuration, which is a simplified version of the regular PF6000 GUI.

Enabling StepSync

In order for StepSync to work, it has to be enabled on the Sync Reference. There are two ways to enable StepSync:

• Set the I/O signal Enable Operation (10055) to High, or

• In the Sync reference, go to Configurations, then to the General Virtual Station tab, and click on Edit for the configuration in question. Then, in the Fixtured

Stations field, set Auto Enable to Always.

If StepSync has not been enabled, at runtime the user will be presented with an error message saying "Unable to start, enable signal is low."

Configuring the Sync Member

1. Select the Controller menu, then select the StepSync tab.

1. In the StepSync section, select No Sync

The Step Sync Mode window appears.

1. Select Sync Member

The Step Sync Mode window closes.

1. In the Channel field, set the channel number for the Sync Member by selecting the channel number. Then select the

appropriate channel for the Sync Member.

The channel numbers of the Sync Members in the same set-up must be unique.

1. Select Apply.

The controller will reboot and boot into the Sync Member configuration, which will only display the Sync Member's channel number.

Switching back to regular PF6000 mode (exiting StepSync)

1. Select the PF6 FlexSystem menu, then select the StepSync tab.

1. In the StepSync section, select Sync Reference

The Step Sync Mode window appears.

1. Select No Sync

The Step Sync Mode window closes.

1. Select Apply.

The controller will reboot and boot into the regular configuration.

Setting up StepSync (hardware)

The StepSync function allows several POWER FOCUS 6000 to be connected in order to run synchronized tightenings.

1. Make sure each controller has been configured correctly (see StepSync Configuration for more information).

1. Using a PF6000 daisy-chain cable, connect the Sync Reference Com Port B to the first Sync Member's Com Port A.

1. Using another PF6000 daisy-chain cable, connect the first Sync Member's Com Port B to the second Sync Member's Com Port A.

Do the same for all subsequent controllers.

A StepSync system can be configured with a maximum of 5 Sync Members.

A Sync Reference D Connected to Com Port A

B Sync Member E PF6000 daisy-chain cable

C Connected to Com Port B

StepSync Tightenings

The only possible tightening programs to use in conjunction with StepSync are Multistep tightening programs. To synchronization between the tools in the set-up, Synchronization points are used. At these points, the tools will wait for each other before continuing with the next step in the Multistep tightening program. Note that assigning tightening programs to the different tools can only take place in ToolsTalk 2.

Example of a Multistep tighteningprogram for StepSync

A Synchronization point

A tightening program can consist of a maximum of 10 steps (not counting the Synchronization points).

Available steps

Tighten to Angle

Tighten to Torque

Tighten to Torque plus Angle

Tighten to DynaTork

Wait

Socket Release

Tighten to Torque or Angle

Loosen to Angle

Loosen to Torque

Rundown

Tighten to Yield M2

Tighten to Yield

Tighten to Torque and Angle

Thread cutting to torque

Engage

Available Monitors

Angle

Peak Torque

Shut Off Torque

Torque rate and deviation

Torque in angle window

Post view torque high

Post view torque los

Angle from Yield

Prevailing Torque

Shut Off Current

Post Thread cut angle

Post Thread cut peak torque

Stick Slip Detection

Time

Available Step Restrictions

Maximum Torque

Maximum Angle

Cross Thread

Rescinding Torque

Torque Gradient

Torque in Angle View

Torque vs Current Deviation

Reject Management

Action if failure Description

End all All channels will end the tightening and report status NOK.

The tightening that did not have an error itself will report additional info Terminated by other bolt.

Continue OK The failing channels will end the tightening with status NOK.

The remaining channels will continue with the rest of the tightening program.

StepSync Results

The results for all the tools in the StepSync tightening will be shown on the controller GUI of the Sync Reference and in its corresponding Web GUI. The GIU on the Sync Members will not show any results.

There are three different Result views. The first shows an overview of the total status for the entire tightening (OK or NOK) and the total number of OK and NOK bolts. The second shows the status for each bolt separately, and the third also shows the torque and angle values for each bolt.

Example of Overall Status View

Example of Overall Status view with Bolt Status

Example of Detailed Status view

Step Sync Signals

The StepSync system supports the same I/O signals listed in the tables below. These can be mapped in fieldbus configuration and accessory configuration. Some are also available through Open Protocol.

Input Signals

Abort Sequence - 10012

When a Batch sequence abort request is received, the Batch sequence functionality aborts the batch sequence only after getting the ongoing tightening result.

Name in SoftPLC: ABORT_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Decrement - 10002

Incrementally decreases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_DECREMENT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Increment - 10001

Incrementally increases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_INCREMENT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Tightening Program - 10008

Skips the next tightening program in the running batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: BYPASS_PSET

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Fieldbus - 10049

Disables the fieldbus.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_FIELDBUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable tool - 30000

If the signal is set to True, a tool is immediately stopped and locked.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Dynamic Batch Size - 10074

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus Lock Loosening - 20021

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a loosening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory. An ongoing loosening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Loosening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Fieldbus Lock Tightening - 20020

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a tightening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory. An ongoing tightening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Tightening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Flush Read Result Queue - 30005

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE_TPID

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Lock Loosening - 20003

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tightening - 20002

Tool locked for tightening by digital input.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active High - 20004

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active Low - 20061

Locks the tool when this signal is low.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Master Unlock - 10005

Unlocks most locks defined in lock page.

Name in SoftPLC: MASTER_UNLOCK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Pulse Stop - 10030

If this signal is generated any ongoing tightening or loosening will be stopped. Used in combination with 10024 or 10072.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_STOP_PULSE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Read Result Handshake Ack - 30004

Enable the Read Result Handshake feature in the Fieldbus device for making the controller available for the signal Rear Result Handshake Ack.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Reset All Identifiers - 10115

In Source batch string used to reset all received string identifiers from string receiving sequence at once. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_ALL_IDENTIFIERS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch - 10003

Resets the batch counter to 0. No batch OK (nxOK). If batch OK is activated, it will be deactivated.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch Sequence - 10053

Resets the Batch Sequence. Unlocks a tool that is locked by Tool Lock on Complete.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Latest Identifier - 10114

In Source batch string used to reset latest received string from string receiving sequence. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_LATEST_IDENTIFIER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Sequence Status - 10118

Resets signals Batch Sequence Done/OK/NOK and Sequence Aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_SEQUENCE_STATUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Too Many NOK - 10013

Reset the batch after receiving lock Too Many NOK

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_TOO_MANY_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input - 10020

Selects Tightening Program withing Source Tightening/Batch within sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_INPUT_VALUE

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Select Input and Dynamic Batch Size - 30007

It is used to set the Batch Size for a specific "Identifier Number" in a Source Tightening Task, running "External batch control".

Batch size can be set to 1-250.

If Batch size is set to 0, it is treated as infinite batch. The user is not able to un-set a Batch back to a state where it has no size, once it has been set.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Select Input Bit 0 - 10016

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_0

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 1 - 10017

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_1

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 2 - 10018

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_2

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 3 - 10019

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_3

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 4 - 10066

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_4

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 5 - 10067

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_5

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 6 - 10068

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_6

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 7 - 10069

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_7

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 8 - 10070

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_8

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 9 - 10071

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_9

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Loosening - 10029

Selects loosening as default operation mode and used in combination with Start Tools -10028 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_LOOSENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Next Identifier Number - 10116

It is possible to use the signal Select Next Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

Batch Sequence

Source Tightening

Source Batch

Number Identifier method

String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Next Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Next Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number. If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 1,2,4,5,1,2,4... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the next identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task. The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the next larger one.

When the biggest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next bigger identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the identifier number has been added to the Source Tightening list, but no tightening program has ever been assigned to it, it is skipped while looping through the Source Tightening list.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Next Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Next Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Next Identifier Number iterates and selects 1,2,4,8,0,1,2...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Next Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_NEXT_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117

It is possible to use the signal Select Previous Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

Batch Sequence

Source Tightening

Source Batch

Number Identifier method

String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number. If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 5,4,2,1,5,4,2... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the previous identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task. The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the previous lower one.

When the smallest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next smaller identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number iterates and selects 8,4,2,1,0,8,4...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Previous Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_PREVIOUS_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Loosening - 10011

Active signal starts loosening. Once digital input goes inactive the loosening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_LOOSENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening - 10010

Active signal starts tightening. Once input goes inactive the tightening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_TIGHTENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening Pulse - 10024

The tightening starts at signal. Runs until the tightening is finished, or until the 30 sec timeout in tightening program occurs.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_START_PULSE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tools - 10028

Active signal which starts the tool (default operation mode is tightening). As soon as signal goes inactive the tool must be stopped. Used in combination with Select Loosening - 10029 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: START_DRIVE_CONTINIOUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To SoftPLC - 10065

Name in SoftPLC: TO_PLC

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051

Unlocks a tool that is locked by "Tool Lock on Complete".

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_COMPLETE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Disable - 10059

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_DISABLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Output Signals

Set when an identifier string has been received and accepted by the work-task; it is necessary that even sequence or tightening program are running. If running Source batch-string, it is set when all scans have been received and a sequence had been selected. In that case it includes concatenated string consisted of saved positions. For other work-tasks it includes the “VIN” number.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_IDENTIFIER_STRING

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_1

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_2

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_3

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_4

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

The batch counter is equal to the batch size number. Result can be OK or NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Current number in the batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COUNT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates that a batch in a batch sequence is running.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_RUNNING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch sequence finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch sequence finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates when a sequence is completed, both in case Batch Sequence Completed OK and Batch Sequence Completed NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_COMPLETED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Indicates if the Batch Sequence is running or not.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCHSEQUENCE_RUNNING

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Name in SoftPLC: BOLT_TIGHTENING_STATUS

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Output for all subsignals.

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_HARDWARE_STATUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Output for all subsignals.

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_TIGHTENING_STATUS

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Output for all subsignals.

Name in SoftPLC: CONFIGURATION_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Set to true at start up of IO Exchange

Name in SoftPLC: IO_ON

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Shows the index of the current running batch in a sequence. If socket selector is used it will show zero if none, more than one or wrong socket is selected. For source tightening it will show 1 if batch mode is used and a batch is running.

Name in SoftPLC: CURRENT_RUNNING_BATCH_IX

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_COMPLETE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_READY_TO_START

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: CYCLE_RUNNING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Emergency Stop - 20036

Name in SoftPLC: EMERGENCY_STOP

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Event Code - 30001

Relay an event when it is triggered. Momentary, on for two cycle times.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Event Code Severity - 30003

Event Code Severity is an output signal which is activated when the triggered event has severity of error or warning.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE_SEVERITY

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates if event is triggered. It is only triggered on accessories if event requires an ACK.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_PRESENT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC:

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

State uint8 array 48 2048

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: FIELDBUS_DISCONNECTED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

From SoftPLC - 10064

Allocated bytes for data transfer from PLC to accessories.

Name in SoftPLC: FROM_PLC

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus:FALSE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Set directly when an identifier has been received in the work-task. For Source batch-string, it is set at every scanning in scan process, thus it is changed for every scanning and sent even if it does not match in length. String set is in raw format and not only "saved positions" in the string. For other work-tasks this signal is equal to Active Identifier String signal.

Name in SoftPLC: LAST_RECEIVED_ID_STRING

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

The loosening is disabled.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

NOK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

OK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates Max coherent NOK tightening counter is reachead.

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_COHERENT_NOK_REACHED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: NO_SYSTEM_ERROR

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Defines the starting level for a tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_START

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Read Result Queue Flushed - 30006

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 1 might not correspond to the first configured string, but to the first received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_1

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 2 might not correspond to the second configured string, but to the second received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_2

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 3 might not correspond to the third configured string, but to the third received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_3

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 4 might not correspond to the fourth configured string, but to the fourth received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_4

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Remaining tightenings in a batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: REMAINING_BATCH

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_MODE_ID

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_0

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_1

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_2

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_3

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_4

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_5

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_6

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_7

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_8

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_9

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Shows the index of the selected batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_BATCH_SEQUENCE_ID

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Output signal indicating if sequence was aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: SEQUENCE_ABORTED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Shows the size of the currently running sequence. Only set when a sequence is loaded and not reset when sequence is done.

Name in SoftPLC: SIZE_OF_RUNNING_SEQUENCE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MAJOR_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MINOR_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Version of the software running.

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_RELEASE_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates when the Virtual Station is ready.

Name in SoftPLC: STATION_READY

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_MODE_ID

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

The tightening is disabled; it is not possible to make any tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

At least one result of the tightening is outside the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

The result of the tightening is within the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates that the tool is loosening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_LOOSENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates that the tool is tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_TIGHTENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Channel Command - 10054

Name in SoftPLC: CHANNEL_COMMAND

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

This signal contains subsignals, refer to Subsignals - Input for all the subsignals.

Disable Test Bolt - 10057

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_TESTBOLT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Enable Operation - 10055

Name in SoftPLC: ENABLE_OPERATION

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Fieldbus AsyncData To PF - 10077

Name in SoftPLC:

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

State uint8 array 16 2048

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Reset Cycle Status - 10056

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_CYCLE_STATUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset System Error - 10062

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_SYSTEM_ERROR

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Loosening, Pulse - 10072

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_PREVIOUS_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tools, Pulse - 10113

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

StepSync compatible tools

The following tools are supported by StepSync:

Tool Family Supported Models

Tensor STR ETV, ETD, ETP

Tensor ST ETV, ETD, ETP

Tensor SL ETV, ETD, ETP, ETF

Tensor SR ETV, ETD, ETP

QST All (Excluding Dual Transducer - CTT, CTA, CTTA)

StepSync CAN Accessories

The following CAN accessories are supported by a PF6000 Step Sync system:

Internal I/O

I/O Expander

Operator Panel

Stack light

Indicator box

These accessories can only be connected to the Sync Reference. No accessories can be connected to Sync Members.

Working with the Settings Tab

Configuration of the Network

The POWER FOCUS 6000 can be set up to be accessed from the Atlas Copco software ToolsTalk or from a web browser on a Local Area Network (LAN). It can also be accessed directly from a connected PC. It uses the IPv4 protocol.

To access and alter the Ethernet settings, select Edit.

Only the Factory Ethernet port can be configured. The Service Ethernet port has a designated IP address, 169.254.1.1, that must not be connected to the local network.

Accessing the Controller On Lan

Select the Settings menu, and click on Edit to access the Factory Ethernet port window. There you can alter the Ethernet settings.

Connect the network cable to the Factory Ethernet port and then either manually specify the required information or, if available, use the information provided by the DHCP server. Required information is:

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway

This information is provided by the local system administrator.

When using the manual option there are optional settings available for the use of DNS servers.

Accessing the Controller Through a Web GUI

Connect the PC with a straight-through Ethernet cable (RJ45) to the Service Ethernet port. Access the controller with the IP address from a web browser.

About the Firewall

The POWER FOCUS 6000 can be set up to use a firewall. The firewall is based on the trusted host principle, and only allows incoming connections via ports that are enabled, or addresses that are white-listed.

By default, the firewall is disabled.

The firewall applies only to incoming connections on the Factory Ethernet Port.

Activating and configuring the firewall

To activate and configure the firewall, select Edit.

In the top container, activate the general firewall feature by setting it to On. In the remaining containers, configure any of the following firewall layers:

Port Filtering (layer 4 firewall). Opening a service on the controller - you can specify which services are reachable through the firewall.

IP Filtering (layer 3 firewall). Specifying a trusted host by IP- you can specify an IP that is considered trusted on the network and can access all the services.

MAC Filtering (layer 2 firewall). Specifying a trusted host by MAC.

When activating the general firewall feature, Port Filtering (layer 4 firewall) and all its predefined services are enabled by default.

A connection is allowed, when any of the firewall layers accepts it. When no firewall layer is enabled, all incoming connections are allowed through.

Further firewall configuring is done by enabling/disabling connections through the predefined services specified, by adding TCP or UDP ports manually and/or by white-listing IP/MAC addresses.

Port Filtering (layer 4 firewall)

When Port Filtering (layer 4 firewall) sets Firewall rules, and TCP and UDP ports.

Port Filtering (layer 4 firewall) can be turned ON or OFF. When Port Filtering (layer 4 firewall) is ON, the firewall is performing packet filtering based on destination port, and packets sent to an open port are immediately accepted. Non-matching packets are also processed by the other firewall types (IP Filtering and MAC Filtering) before being eventually rejected. When Port Filtering (layer 4 firewall) is OFF, port filtering is disabled and all the other settings are hidden.

Predefined services have their own enable-switches:

Open ports for web services (TCP 80, TCP 8080)

Open ports for SSH and SFTP (TCP 22)

Open ports for wireless tools (UDP 6677, TCP 6678)

Open ports for accessories (TCP 25000)

Additional TCP ports

Additional UDP ports

Predefined service Description

Open ports for web (TCP 80, TCP 8080) Ports required for web services so the controller is accessible over the factory network.

Open ports for SSH and SFTP (TCP 22) Port required for SSH and SFTP functionality on the Factory Ethernet Port.

Open ports for wireless tools (UDP 6677, TCP 6678)

Ports required for wireless tools to connect to the controller over the factory network.

Open ports for accessories (TCP 25000) Ports required for accessories to communicate with the controller over the factory network. This applies to Socket Selector 6.

Open additional TCP ports Accepted are both comma-separated ports and port ranges using a dash (-). Example: when entering 1,2,3,4-10, all ports between 1 and 10 are opened.

Open additional UDP ports

Ports are automatically sorted after pressing the Apply button.

When using Open Protocol, the ports to be opened must be added manually in the Open additional TCP ports entry box. For example: 4545,4546,4547 (depending on the ports configured in Virtual Station > Virtual Station 1 > Protocols > Open Protocol > Server Port).

When using an NTP server, port 123 must be added manually in the Open additional UDP ports entry box.

IP Filtering (layer 3 firewall)

IP Filtering (layer 3 firewall) allows specifying trusted hosts or networks by entering their IP addresses in the IP White List entry box. To access the entry box, set the switch to On. Accepted entries are lists of IP addresses or network addresses in the form of IP tables, that is, host IP addresses or network IP addresses. The network mask can be entered as mask length (for example, /24) or as network IP address (for example, /255.255.255.0). Packets coming from a white-listed IP address are immediately allowed. Other packets are screened by the other firewall layers (Port Filtering and MAC Filtering).

IP address white-list example

Due to security issues, entering host names or network names is not accepted.

MAC Filtering (layer 2 firewall)

MAC Filtering (layer 2 firewall) allows specifying trusted hosts or networks by entering their MAC addresses in the MAC White List entry box. To access the entry box, set the switch to On. Accepted entries are comma-separated lists of MAC addresses. Packets coming from a whitelisted MAC address are immediately allowed. Other packets are screened by the other firewall layers (Port Filtering and IP Filtering).

MAC address white-list example

Packet counters

To display the Firewall statistics for each firewall layer, select Settings > Network > Firewall - Packet Counters.

The Update section includes the following buttons:

Refresh – used to refresh the displayed packet counters.

Reset – used to reset the packet counters to zero.

Both buttons are implemented with a switch that automatically resets itself to the original position after performing the action.

The Accepted Packet Counters section displays the counters for each of the firewall types and for rejected packets.

Port Filtering – displays the packet counter for packets accepted by the Port Filtering firewall type.

IP Filtering – displays the packet counter for packets accepted by the IP Filtering firewall type.

MAC Filtering – displays the packet counter for packets accepted by the MAC Filtering firewall type.

Rejected – displays the packet counter for packet that were rejected.

The packets accepted, and thus counted, by the Port, IP and MAC Filtering rules only include the initial packets that establish a connection.

The Rejected packets are all counted and displayed.

Firewall status

The status of the general firewall feature and its firewall layers is shown in the Firewall main view directly under Settings > Network.

Status Description

OK The firewall is enabled and the firewall configuration is applied.

Disabled The firewall is disabled and the firewall configuration is not applied.

Configuration Error The firewall is enabled, but the firewall configuration is not applied due to an internal error.

For safety reasons, the fail-open policy is applied, meaning all connections are allowed through.

When the general firewall status is OK, the status (Enabled / Disabled) for the respective firewall layers is also shown.

Configuration of the Protocol

The POWER FOCUS 6000 can be set up to communicate with servers running an Atlas Copco license manager as well as the two Atlas Copco softwares ToolsTalk and ToolsNet. ToolsTalk is used to configure one or several controllers. ToolsNet is used to handle result reporting.

Configuring ToolsTalk Communication

To connect a controller to ToolsTalk, configure and activate the ToolsTalk protocol settings on the controller.

Parameters for ToolsTalk communication

Field Description

On/Off Enables/Disables communication with the ToolsTalk server

Server host ToolsTalk server IP address

Server port ToolsTalk server port

Configuring ToolsNet Communication

To connect a controller to ToolsNet for collection of tightening results, configure and activate the ToolsNet protocol settings in the controller.

Field Description

On/Off Enables/Disables communication with the ToolsNet server

Server host ToolsNet server IP address

Server port ToolsNet server port

Configuring a License Manager

The Atlas Copco license manager is connected to a controller and the protocol settings are activated on the controller from the Server connections tab in the Settings menu.

Field Description

On/Off Enables/Disables communication with the Atlas Copco license manager.

Server host Atlas Copco license manager server IP address

Server port Atlas Copco license manager server port

Configuration of the Preferences

Preferences contains general settings such as date and time, language, torque unit, and startup screen.

Configuring the Date and Time

Date and time must be set in order for events and results to get the correct time stamp for when they occurred.

The time is retrieved from one of three available sources:

Manual

NTP

ToolsNet

When the source is set to Manual the date, time, and time zone are set manually.

When the source is set to NTP, the date and time is retrieved from an NTP server defined in the GUI.

When the source is set to ToolsNet, the date and time is retrieved fron the ToolsNet server.

Parameters to set date and time

Field Description

Source Source to retrieve the time from.

Date Date entered manually if the source is set to manual.

Time Time entered manually if the source is set to manual.

Time zone The time zone; either the location or a standard time zone such as UTC (coordinated universal time)

NTP Server IP-address of an NTP server providing date and time for the controller.

Configuring the Displayed Controller Language

The controller GUI is translated into twelve languages. To change the language of the GUI:

1. Tap or click on the arrow beside the name of the language currently in use.

1. Choose a language from the list.

The language change will take effect immediately.

Available GUI languages

Language As displayed in controller

English English

Czech Čeština

German Deutsch

Spanish Español

French Français

Korean 한국어

Italian Italiano

Japanese 日本語

Portuguese Português

Russian Русский

Swedish Svenska

Chinese 中文

Configuring the Displayed Torque Unit

Choose the unit to use for torque values and results. Torque results are displayed in the chosen unit both after a tightening is performed and when stored in the results list.

To change the torque unit used in the controller GUI:

1. Tap or click on the arrow beside the name of the unit currently in use.

1. Choose a unit from the list.

The torque unit change will take effect immediately.

Available torque units

Unit Description

cNm centinewton metre

dNm decinewton metre

Nm newton metre

kNm kilonewton metre

in·lbf inch-pound force

ft·lbf foot-pound force

in·ozf inch ounce-force

Unit Description

ft·ozf foot ounce-force

gf·cm gram-force centimetre

kgf·cm kilogram-force centimetre

kgf·m kilogram-force metre

Configuring the Startup Screen

The default screen at startup of the controller is the Home screen. It is possible to change startup screen to the Result screen.

A change of startup screen in the settings requires a restart of the controller or a refresh of the web GUI.

Configuration of the PIN Settings

The PIN code prevents unauthorized usage of the controller or accidental changes.

If enabled, a PIN code is required when accessing the controller either from the controller-GUI or Web-GUI.

Configuring the PIN

It is possible to have one or many different PIN configurations on the controller. Users can decide whether or not to activate one or several PIN configurations at the same time.

Each PIN configuration consists of a four-digit number based PIN, a user name and a switch for enabling or disabling the user/PIN.

When PIN is enabled and the screen is locked, a locked padlock icon is shown at the upper-right corner of the GUI and the user is able to browse the GUI with read- only access only. Any GUI widgets that can be used to change any settings is greyed out or disabled.

The screen lock is automatically turned on after a certain time of inactivity, configurable by the user. The minimum value of the inactivity time is 20 sec and the maximum value is 600 sec. The inactivity time is configurable and applies to all PIN configurations.

After a system startup, the controller is locked if the PIN is turned on, regardless of the current inactivity time.

The users and PIN configured apply also to the Service Port (169.254.1.1). To enable PIN protection on the Service Port, set Use PIN for Service Port to On.

Each controller can register up to 10 users. The PIN of each configuration has to be unique. It is required to have at least one configuration to be able to enable the PIN functionality on the controller. When a new PIN configuration has been added, the PIN must be entered twice to make sure that the correct digits have been entered.

The PIN can be configured from the Embedded controller-GUI, Web-based controller-GUI or Tools Talk 2.

Adding New Users

1. On the Home view, select the Settings Tab. Then, select PIN.

1. In the PIN window, select Configure.

1. Select the Plus icon at the upper-right corner of the GUI; the PIN-User Name window appears (if no user is stored in the

controller) or is updated (if, at least, one user is stored in the controller).

1. Select the user name; the User window appears.

Enter the Name and the PIN of the user, and then confirm the PIN.

The User Name must be unique.

The PIN in both fields (Enter PIN and Confirm PIN) need to match for the changes to be applied. By default, dots are indicated in both the text box, but these are just placeholders and need to be replaced with actual PIN codes.

1. Select Apply.

Enabling Users

1. On the Home view, select the Settings Tab. Then, select PIN.

1. In the PIN window, select Configure.

1. In the PIN-User Name window, select the check box to the left of the user name to be enabled.

PIN can also be enabled by clicking on the user name and setting the Enabled switch to On.

Activating the PIN configuration

1. On the Home view, select the Settings Tab. Then, select PIN.

1. In the PIN window, select Configure.

1. In the PIN-activating window, set the boolean switch to On.

The PIN can only be activated when at least one user/PIN is enabled. If no user/PIN is enabled, a Warning pop-up window appears.

1. Enter the Inactivity Timeout (in seconds), which defines the slot of time after which the screen is automatically locked up.

Default value for Inactivity Timeout is 120 seconds: this is a global setting, and cannot be set on a per user basis.

Unlocking the controller-GUI or Web-GUI

1. On the Home view, select the Padlock icon at the upper-right corner of the GUI. A pop-up window with a numeric keypad

appears.

1. Enter the configured PIN code and select OK.

When the PIN is enabled and the screen has been unlocked, an Open Padlock icon appears at the upper-right corner of the GUI. The controller-GUI or Web-GUI can be locked again manually, by selecting the Open Padlock icon

Disabling Users

1. On the Home view, select the Settings Tab. Then, select PIN.

1. In the PIN window, select Configure.

1. In the PIN-User Name window, clear the check box to the left of the user name to be disabled.

PIN can also be disabled by clicking on the user name and setting the Enabled switch to Off.

Deleting Users

1. On the Home view, select the Settings Tab. Then, select PIN.

1. In the PIN window, select Configure.

1. In the PIN-User Name window, select the red Delete icon to the right of the user name.

Configuration of the Tool Alarms

Alarms are set to control when to perform maintenance or calibration on the tools connected to the controller.

The tool service interval and other information are found in the tool view on the Tool menu.

Different tool alarms

Field Description

Service indicator alarm Enables an alarm for when the service interval for the tool is reached.

Tool lock after alarm Lock the tool when the service interval is reached.

Calibration alarm Enables the tool calibration alarm for all tools connected to the controller.

Configuration of the Wireless Settings

The Wireless settings in the controller activates the use of a WLAN and Bluetooth.

1. In the Settings menu, select the Wireless tab.

1. Depending on your tool (WLAN-equipped tools are marked IRC-W, while Bluetooth-equipped tools are marked IRC-B) set

Enabled to On.

Configurations of the Events Settings

It is possible to configure the events available in the controller as either or several of:

Acknowledged

Logged

Displayed

Configuration of the Fieldbus

The fieldbus section consists of information about the fieldbus type in use. This part is hardware dependent and read-only. The configuration section with general settings for the fieldbus in use is possible to edit.

The fieldbus mapping and the assigning of fieldbus maps to virtual stations are done with ToolsTalk. For more information refer to the ToolsTalk configurations manual.

Creating a General Fieldbus Configuration

When a new fieldbus module is installed in the controller, General Fieldbus Configuration settings can be setup directly via the GUI, without the need of using ToolsTalk 2.

For configurations related to the fieldbus frame and connecting a fieldbus configuration to a Virtual Station, ToolsTalk 2 will still be needed.

1. Go to the Settings menu, and then select Fieldbus.

1. Select the Create Config button.

If no Fieldbus module is installed this button will not be visible.

1. Configure the following parameters:

Set by network: OFF/ON

Read result handshake: OFF/ON

Lock tool when fieldbus offline: OFF/ON

Sync on task selected: OFF/ON

OFF - Task changes made in the Virtual Station are ignored.

YES - Task changes made in the Virtual Station are synced with the Fieldbus module.

1. Depending on the installed module type, enter the Fieldbus communication specific settings:

IP Address

Subnet mask

Gateway

1. A new Configuration is created.

If a Fieldbus configuration already exists on the controller, this will have to be removed before creating a new configuration. When the configuration has been removed, instead of a Remove button there will be a Create Config button.

Configuration of the Results

The Results menu allows the user to configure the label names for results displayed in the Results list.

Changing Result Status names

1. Go to Settings, then Results, and click on Customized detailed status.

1. Find the Status name you want to alter.

1. Write the new name in the corresponding field in the New status name on the right.

Factory Reset Controller

It is possible to undo the controller to the original factory settings.

All settings, events, configurations and historical data are deleted when the controller is reset. Do a factory reset only when you are completely sure that this is required.

Performing a Controller Factory Reset

1. On the Home view, select the Settings Tab. Then, on the left, select Reset.

1. In the Factory Reset Controller window, select Reset.

The controller restarts to activate the new settings.

Operation

In this section, you can find step-by-step information about how to operate the product.

Remote Start and Emergency Stop

Remote Start Configuration

Whenever using remote start you must enable an emergency stop solution for safety reasons. For more information about emergency stop, see Emergency stop (EM Stop) in the product instructions for POWER FOCUS 6000.

When using a tool with some type of safety handle (such as a trigger start button or a safety lever), remote start must be disabled by setting the switch to Off. This is done to ensure that it is not possible to override the safety function within the tool.

Emergency Stop

The supply disconnecting device may serve as an emergency stop when it is readily accessible to the operator and it is of the type described in EN 60204-1:2006, 5.3.2 a), b), c) or d). When intended for such use, the supply disconnecting device shall be colored red and have a yellow background. (Ref. EN 60204-1:2006, 10.7.5).

The POWER FOCUS 6000 provides an infrastructure to build an Emergency Stop function with redundant breaking according to EN ISO 13849-1 category 3 PL d. The Emergency Stop function must be used when using remote start functionality.

The Emergency Stop functionality can be used with a supply-disconnecting device (such as an Emergency Stop button). When the Emergency Stop button is activated, it breaks the supply voltage to the controller.

A diagnose of the system is run automatically at the start of the controller. This is done both after an emergency stop and at a normal start.

The Emergency Stop function is used with either a single controller or up to 10 controllers in a single emergency stop chain. In a multiple controller configuration, the Emergency Stop signal is distributed from the first controller to all interconnected controllers using the I/O bus interface. The last controller in the chain returns a feedback signal to indicate that all controllers have received the Emergency Stop signal. The event Emergency Stop is displayed.

For the Emergency Stop there is a 24V DC output through the Emergency Stop interface on the connector panel.

Cabling

Emergency Stop Button Cables

Cable dimensions for the emergency stop button

Single 0.7 mm cable 400 meters

I/O Cables

Cable dimensions for I/O cables

AWG 22 cable Maximum total length

4 controllers 200 meters

5 controllers 140 meters

6 controllers 100 meters

8 controllers 70 meters

10 controller 50 meters

Pin Configurations for Emergency Stop

The Power Focus has an external EM Stop interface and I/O bus on the connector panel located behind the front access door.

The following sections describe the available PINs on the connecting panel, and the use of the different PINs to connect an EM Stop button.

Single Controller with Emergency Stop Button

Connector: Phoenix, 6-pin Headers 3.5mm pitch

Use the following pins to attach an EM Stop button:

Pin Use

1 Do not use

2 Do not use

3 Attach an emergency button between pin 3 and pin 4

5 Attach an emergency button between pin 5 and pin 6

Connections for a single controller

7 Connect a jumper between pin 7 and pin 8

9 Connect a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10

Single Controller without Emergency Stop Button

Connector: Phoenix, 6-pin Headers 3.5mm pitch

Remote start switch must be set to OFF for this configuration

Use the following PIN configuration:

Pin Use

1 Do not use

2 Do not use

3 Connect a jumper between pin 3 and pin 4

5 Connect a jumper between pin 5 and pin 6

Connections with no EM stop

7 Connect a jumper between pin 7 and pin 8

9 Connect a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10

The PIN configuration differs depending on the location of the controller in the EM Stop chain.

First Controller with an Emergency Stop Button Connected

EM Stop button connector: Phoenix, 6-pin Headers 3.5mm pitch

EM Stop I/O cable connector: Molex Micro-Fit, 5-pin

Use the following pin configuration:

Pin Use

1 Do not use

2 Do not use

3 Attach an emergency button between pin 3 and pin 4

5 Attach an emergency button between pin 5 and pin 6

Connections for the first controller

7 Connect a jumper between pin 7 and pin 8

9 Do not use

10 Do not use

Controllers Between First and Last

EM Stop I/O cable connector: Molex Micro-Fit, 5-pin

Remove plug or use the following pin configuration:

Pin Use

1 Do not use

2 Do not use

3 Do not use

4 Do not use

5 Do not use

6 Do not use

Connections for middle controllers

7 Do not use

8 Do not use

9 Do not use

10 Do not use

Last Controller

EM Stop I/O cable connector: Molex Micro-Fit, 5-pin

Use the following pin configuration:

Pin Use

1 Do not use

2 Do not use

3 Do not use

4 Do not use

5 Do not use

6 Do not use

Connections for last controller

7 Do not use

8 Do not use

9 Connect a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10

DIG IN/OUT Connectors

The POWER FOCUS 6000 uses the same hardware accessories (Stacklight, Operator panel etc.) as the Power Focus 4000 system. However, the digital input and output connectors are configured differently and use a different plug. In order to rewire the plug from Power Focus 4000 to POWER FOCUS 6000 correctly, use the connector descriptions in the following sections.

Digital Output Connectors

The POWER FOCUS 6000 has a connector with four configurable internal digital outputs (DIG OUT) that are located behind the front access door.

Digital Output Connector

For the POWER FOCUS 6000.

Pin Relay Function

1 Normally closed

2 Relay 1 Common

3 Normally open

4 Normally closed

5 Relay 2 Common

6 Normally open

7 Normally closed

8 Relay 3 Common

Connectors for output

9 Normally open

10 Normally closed

11 Relay 4 Common

12 Normally open

Digital Output Connector for Power Focus 4000

Pin Relay Function

12 Normally closed

11 Relay 4 Common

10 Normally open

9 Normally closed

8 Relay 3 Common

7 Normally open

6 Normally closed

5 Relay 2 Common

Connectors for output

4 Normally open

3 Normally closed

2 Relay 1 Common

1 Normally open

Digital Input Connectors

The POWER FOCUS 6000 has a connector with four configurable internal digital inputs (DIG IN) that are located behind the front access door.

Digital Input Connector

For POWER FOCUS 6000.

Pin Function

13 24V

14 24V

15 0V

16 0V

17 0V

18 Digital input -

19 Digital input 1 +

20 Digital input 2 +

21 Digital input 3 +

22 Digital input 4 +

Digital Input Connector for Power Focus 4000

Pin Function

22 GND (+24VDC isolated)

21 +24VDC isolated

20 Digital input 4 -

19 Digital input 4 +

18 Digital input 3 -

17 Digital input 3 +

16 Digital input 2 -

15 Digital input 2 +

14 Digital input 1 -

13 Digital input 1 +

Reports and Statistics

In this section, you can learn about available reports and statistics.

Working with the Reports Tab

Results

This section describes how to access tightening results on the POWER FOCUS 6000 controller and how to read the information given in the different result views. It describes both the live results view available after each tightening and the historical results view available in Results on the Reports menu.

When a tightening is performed, the results are stored on the controller. Results can also be sent to an external system such as ToolsNet or exported for analysis using the export function.

Live Results

The Live Results pop up window shows results from the different virtual stations on the controller in the upper four as well as the lower four panes. The reason for this is that you can choose two different result views for the same virtual station to be shown at the same time.

Select a result pane to open a window where you can step through the different result views by clicking the arrows at the side of the result window.

Result View - Numbers

The first window will display the result in numbers.

 Point and click on image to see more information:

A

F

G

B

H

C

J

D

K

E

A Virtual station name

B Batch sequence name

C Batches in sequence

An OK batch is colored green.

An ongoing batch is colored yellow.

An NOK batch is colored red.

D Tightenings in batch

An OK tightening is colored green.

An ongoing tightening is colored yellow.

An NOK tightening is colored red.

E Result status

An NOK tightening will give a detailed status of the unsuccessful tightening.

F Target torque/angle

G Tightening program name

H Number of completed batches in sequence

J Number of completed tightenings in a batch

K Tightening result

Result View - High-Low Result

The graphic display shows whether the result is high, low or within the set limits.

 Point and click on image to see more information:

A

C

B

A Graphic display showing if the tightening result is too high or too low with respect to the given limits for the tightening program. Torque value.

B Result status

C Angle value

If the tightening is NOK, a detailed reason will be given.

Result View - Extensive Results

The extensive results views will display some additional tightening results.

The second view always shows the identifiers (VIN). If the first screen is already full with parameters, the rest of the parameters are shown on the second screen.

Result View - Identifier Strings

Result View - Trace

With the trace result view, one can learn better how the tightening behaves, in order to make adjustments to the tightening program. Depending on the tightening strategy, the trace will display different tightening parameters.

The trace result is available as two different graphs: torque/time and torque/angle.

Result View - Result Reporter

The list shows the values from the result reporters. If there is a result reporter defined for a program monitor/restriction, the value from that monitor/restriction is reported. If there is no result reporter defined for a program monitor/restriction, the value from the latest executed result reporter in main path is reported.

Evaluation order if several reporters of the same type are defined in a program:

1. result reporter on program monitor/program restriction.

1. result reporter on monitor/restriction of the last executed step in main path.

Values on the highest level of the multistep result set by the corresponding result reporter:

final angle set by result reporter final angle

final torque set by result reporter final torque

current set by result reporter current

Stored Results

The controller stores the result for every tightening or loosening performed.

Showing Stored Results

1. On the Home view, select the Reports Tab. On the left side, Results is automatically selected.

1. In the Results window, select View all results.

The results list shows with the following information:

Date: date and time of the tightening performed.

Virtual Station: Virtual Station which the tightening was performed with.

Tightening Program: Tightening Program column shows Multistep Tightening Program name, or Batch Sequence name followed by the Tightening Program name within the Batch Sequence.

Result: Torque / Angle result.

Limits: Limits column shows values only when the user sets Step Monitor or Step Restriction, or Program Monitor or Program Restrictions.

Step Monitors, Step Restrictions, Program Monitors and Program Restrictions are applicable for Final Torque and Final Angle.

Details: Tightening / loosening result details.

In the Limits column, the minimum / maximum value can be red colored. In this case, the red colored value means that any of the following has occurred:

The measured value is lower than the minimum value set in the Multistep Program.

The measured value is higher than the maximum value set in the Tightening Program.

Showing and Reading Result Traces

1. On the Home view, select the Reports Tab. On the left side, Results is automatically selected.

1. In the Results window, select View all results.

The results list shows in the Results window.

1. Select the necessary result.

The tightening trace shows in the Trace Result View window.

Trace Result View window shows, step by step, the tightening life-cycle. When the tightening is NOK, Trace Result View window shows which Step Monitor or Step Restriction caused it. On the trace graph, the Step Monitor or Step Restriction that caused the NOK tightening in the Step level, is red colored.

On the upper-right corner of the trace graph, select the left-arrow / right-arrow to show the necessary trace graph. The following trace graphs are available:

Torque / Time

Torque / Angle

Angle / Time

Speed / Time

Speed / Angle

Gradient / Time (when the tightening program is configured to make a gradient trace)

Gradient / Angle (when the tightening program is configured to make a gradient trace)

Current / Time

Current / Angle

Step lines are upon the trace graph.

On the trace graph, it is possible to zoom in/out, move the trace, and read x-axis and y-axis values on a specific point. On the lower-left corner of the trace graph, select "+" to zoom in , "-" to zoom out, or the "square icon" to reset the zoom level back to the default view.

On the lower part of the Trace Result View window, select the necessary step to open a pop up window with the detailed step information.

Events

Reading the Information Given in an Event

An event contains information that describes the occurred event as well as some system information to help describe what has happened, where and when.

1 Heading - Describes what part of the system the event concerns.

2 Event name - A short descriptive text of the event.

3 Virtual station - If the event is related to a virtual station on the controller the virtual station name will be displayed.

4 Code - A unique four-digit number that identifies the event.

5 Module - Describes in what part of the system the event concerns.

7 Time - Date and time when the event occurred.

Event Types

Event Information

Event Errors

Event Errors signal a serious condition, such as a failed service, that almost exclusively requires the user to make changes to the setup or the configuration in order to continue.

Configuration of Events

Each event has a default setting for whether they should be acknowledged (Ack), logged (Log) or displayed (Disp). These settings can be configured in Events on the Settings menu.

Some options cannot be changed and they are greyed out.

Event Codes

Events are used to notify the user of certain state changes or occurrences in the system. They are of different types and require different kinds of actions.

Some of the procedures described can only be performed by an Atlas Copco authorized service provider.

Event code Group Description

1000-1999 Controller, Tool Controller and Tool events.

2000-2999 Tool Tool events.

3000-3999 Controller, Drive, Channel, Configuration Controller and Drive events, and Step sync events.

4000-4999 Process Tightening process events.

5000-5999 Configuration Program configuration events.

6000-6999 Accessory Accessory events.

7000-7999 Message Messages.

Table heading Description

Event code The unique event number.

Type Type of event:

Info

Error

Name A descriptive name of the event.

Table heading Description

Description A short description of the event and why it occurred.

Procedure If applicable the procedure contains an instruction on how to clear the event.

A - Acknowledge Tells the user whether the event has to be acknowledged or not before you can proceed. The value in this list is the default value.

L - Log Tells the user whether the event is to be saved in the event log or not. The value in this list is the default value.

D - Display Tells the user whether the event is to be displayed on the screen or not. The value in this list is the default value.

Event

Description Procedure Log Display Ack Code Type Name

1000 Info Controller started The controller is started. N/A X

Generated at start-up if IT-board box serial number (controller serial number) differs from AUX-board box serial number. AUX-board is considered to be non- replaceable in field. The controller will reboot when the serial number is updated.

Replace IT-board or box. X X X

updated

1010 Info Tool connected A tool is connected. N/A X X

1011 Info Tool disconnected A tool is disconnected. N/A X X

1012 Info Tool connection rejected OpenProtocol tool rejected controller connection. Check if another controller is connected to the tool. X X

Change tool

The backup battery should be replaced. X X

2010 Error Tool software version mismatch

Tool and controller software versions not compatible. Service tool - update tool software. X X X

Relocate antenna placement. X

Communication between tool and controller interrupted.

disturbance

2015 Error Tool temperature sensor error SRB and TBP tools only. Service tool. X X

Allow tool to cool down X X

2022 Info Motor tuning completed Motor tuning completed. N/A X

The tool requires open end tuning. Perform open end tuning. X X

tuning

X

2025 Info Open end tuning successful Open end tuning successful. N/A X

X X

Wait until tool temperature has been reduced. X X

Temperature limit has been reached. Tightening has been inhibited to reduce risk for tool shutting down due to overheating.

temperature

2030 Error Tool memory failure, change tool

Tool memory corrupt. Service the tool. X X X

2031 Error Tool accessory memory corrupt Tool accessory memory corrupt. Service the tool accessory. X X X

2040 Error System check failure X X X

Service the tool. X X

2041 Error Torque transducer error Will be generated either on calibration error or if tool reports transducer error.

2042 Error Angle transducer error Service the tool. X X X

2043 Error Tool ground fault error Service the tool. X X X

Perform service of tool. X X

2044 Info Tool service interval expired Indicates that servicing of the tool is needed. Triggered when the number of set tightenings has been exceeded.

Service tool. X X

2046 Info Tool, next calibration date has passed

Indicates that calibration of tool is needed. Triggered when calibration alarm is enabled in settings and the current time is greater than next calibration date.

N/A X X

2047 Info Auto update of servicedata checksum

Indicates that service data checksum has been updated automatically.

2048 Info Tool calibration value updated by QA device

Tool calibration was updated when a calibration with a QA device was performed

X X

Required tool parameters are missing. Update tool parameters. X X

2050 Error Tool parameter file not supported

2060 Info Unexpected trigger behavior Used to prevent start of tool if accessory is connected. N/A X X

2071 Error Tool memory corrupt Tool descriptor is corrupt. Service the tool. X X

2072 Info Unknown device connected X X

X X

Tool accessory bus voltage failure. Service the tool. X X

failure

Tool locked due to tightening program update. X X

2078 Info Tool Tightening program updated

Switch cable. X X

2079 Error Tool cable not supported Tool cable is corrupt. The chip in the cable is not responding or is damaged.

X X

2080 Error Tool battery failure DC voltage too high or too low. Battery failure. Contact the Atlas Copco service representative and send back battery to Atlas Copco (do not reuse it!).

Service the tool. X X

2081 Error Tool current limit reached The current limit has been reached and the drive is disabled.

Service the tool. X X

2082 Error Tool current measurement error

Current measurement error. Current cannot be measured with a reliable result.

Event

Description Procedure Log Display Ack Code Type Name

2083 Error Tool internal error Various internal hardware errors for STB. Service the tool. X X

2084 Error Tool internal software error Various internal software errors for STB. Service the tool. X X

X X

2085 Error Tool RBU error An RBU error was detected by the tool software. Check that the RBU is correctly installed. If error is still present then service the tool.

2086 Error Tool stall Tool motor is stalling. Service the tool. X X

X X

X X

X X

Service the tool X X X

SRB or TBP tool lost communication with battery. Make sure battery is seated correctly. Otherwise change battery

X X

lost

2096 Error Tool battery software version mismatch

SRB or TBP tool battery software incompatible with tool software.

Update software. X X

2100 Info STwrench smartHead removed STwrench smartHead has been removed. Reconnect smartHead and restart the wrench. X X

Wait until the tool status in controller is unlocked. X X

A wrench tightening was performed when the tool status was locked in the controller.

locked

3000 Error Controller internal software error

Software error in the controller. Contact service. X X X

3001 Error Controller clock battery empty Internal battery is getting close to end of life. Replace battery X X X

Cool down. X X

hardware

Temperature limit has been reached. Tightening has been inhibited to reduce risk for controller shutting down due to overheating.

Wait until controller temperature has been reduced. X X

controller temperature

Change IP address on one of the devices. X X

3030 Error IP address conflicting with another node on the network

The set IP address is in use by another device on the same network.

Check the cable connection. X X

3031 Info Network cable unplugged The carrier of the factory port is lost (cable disconnected).

3032 Info Pairing started Tool pairing started. N/A X X

3033 Info Pairing successful Tool pairing successful. N/A X X

Set the tool in pairing mode and try again. X X

3034 Error Pairing unsuccessful: no tool found

The controller found no tool to pair with when scanning for radio peers.

X X

3035 Error Pairing unsuccessful: more than one tool found

The controller found more than one tool when scanning for radio peers.

Ensure that only one tool is in pairing mode when starting the pairing mode on the controller.

X X

3036 Error Pairing unsuccessful: Communication error

The controller experienced a loss of connection, an unexpected answer or timeout during the pairing process.

Try to perform pairing one more time. If it fails again, service the tool.

3037 Info Pairing unsuccessful: Tool slot is full

Clear one tool slot X X

3050 Info System clock updated System clock has been updated. N/A X

3051 Error System clock error Wrong time read from hardware Real Time Clock (RTC). Change RTC battery. X X X

X X

Mismatch between HW and SW remote start configuration.

Check and verify that HW dip switch matches the selected start source.

error

3053 Info Drive connected StepSync drive has been connected. X X

3054 Info Drive disconnected StepSync drive disconnected. X X

Check Toolstalk2 for mode configuration error X X

Generated when a used channel is missing a drive or tool.

Check Channel Menu on the HMI. Connect missing drive or tool.

X X

missing

3057 Info Unable to start, channel is already in use

Generated when a needed channel has been allocated to another virtual station

X X

3058 info No mode selected Select mode X X

X X

Indicates that the controller failed to connect to the local license manager to get licenses.

Check local network. If it fails again, service the controller.

Copco License Manager

3084 Error Soft PLC runtime error eCLR has terminated in an uncontrolled way. X X

3150 Error Software IAM incompatibility IAM is incompatible with the software installed on the controller.

Replace IAM. X X X

3160 Error Failed to activate newly installed software

Something went wrong during the activation. When the newly installed software starts, a fallback to the previous working software happens. This happens when the new software fails to start for three times and only during software installation.

X X X

The controller has started on the inactive software side and not on the expected software side.

3161 Error Started on unexpected software partition

X X X

3500 Error Generic license manager error Inconsistency detected in the feature management system used.

Contact Atlas Copco representative. X X X

X X X

3501 Error License Manager Synchronization Error

X

3502 Info License Manager Synchronization Done

License is used by another source. Check license assignment X X

source in use

Restart license manager X X

needed

3505 Info USB license synchronization started

X

3506 Error USB license synchronization error

X

Event

Description Procedure Log Display Ack Code Type Name

3507 Info USB license synchronization done

X

3508 Info One or more of your licenses are about to expire. Please make sure you have a license server configured

Update licenses X X

Inconsistency detected in a license to be used. Contact Atlas Copco representative. X X

different license definition

4010 Info Tool locked by digital input The tool is locked by a digital input signal. N/A X X

4011 Info Tool locked by open protocol The tool is locked by open protocol. N/A X X

4012 Info Tool locked by field bus The tool is locked by the field bus. N/A X X

4013 Info Tool locked by socket selector Tool is locked when the socket selector is disconnected from the Virtual Station.

Unlock by Master unlock X X

4014 Info Tool locked by Soft PLC Soft PLC signal locked the tool. Unlock by Master Unlock X X

4015 Info Loosening disabled Loosening is disabled in the tightening program X X

4016 Info Tightening disabled X X

Select different tightening program X X

4017 Info Loosening not configured Loosening is not configured in the selected tightening program

X X

4020 Info Too many NOK tightenings Maximum consecutive NOK tightenings in batch is exceeded

4025 Info No Tightening program selected

No tightening program selected. Select tightening program or batch sequence. X X

4030 Info Batch sequence aborted The batch sequence has been aborted. X X

X X

4031 Info Max time to complete batch sequence reached.

X X

4032 Info Max time to complete first tightening reached.

4035 Info Locked by line control X X

4040 Info Locked by alternative identifier Tool locked by alternative identifier. X X

Unlock with signal Unlock Tool on complete. X X

4060 Info Tool locked on batch complete When running a batch with flag Tool lock on batch sequence complete this event is generated when the user press the trigger.

4070 Info Process enter manual mode Indicates that manual mode has been activated for a virtual station

4071 Info Process enter automatic mode Indicates that automatic mode has been entered for a virtual station

4500 Info Result DriveError Internal driver error or driver loss detected.

4501 Info Result Rehit Attempt to tighten an already tightened bolt when Rehit detection is on.

4502 Info Result Soft Start Torque Low Soft start torque below minimum level.

4503 Info Result Soft Start Torque High Soft start torque exceeded maximum level.

4504 Info Result Self Tap Torque High Selftap torque exceeded maximum level.

4505 Info Result Self Tap Torque Low Selftap torque below minimum limit.

4506 Info Result Safety Torque Low Automatically calculated torque value to ensure torque sensor is mounted correctly.

4507 Info Result Rundown Torque High Rundown torque exceeded maximum level.

4508 Info Result Rundown Angle High Rundown angle exceeded maximum level.

4509 Info Result Rundown Time High Rundown time exceeded maximum limit.

4510 Info Result Rundown Time Low Rundown time below minimum limit.

4511 Info Result Rundown Torque Low Rundown torque below minimum level.

4512 Info Result Rundown Angle Low Rundown angle below minimum level.

4513 Info Result Final Torque High Final step torque exceeded maximum level.

4514 Info Result Final Angle High Final step angle exceeded maximum level.

4515 Info Result Final Torque Low Final step torque below minimum level.

4516 Info Result Final Angle Low Final step angle below minimum level.

Redo tightening.

4517 Info Result Tightening Timeout Tightening time limit exceeded. For General Tightening Strategies max tightening time is 30 seconds. For Multistep max tightening time depends on step restriction Maximum Time Limit. Error code is dependent on tightening stage.

4518 Info Result Trigger Lost Tool trigger was released before target was reached.

For General Tightening Strategies it is not allowed to release the trigger before the tightening stage has finished.

For Multistep, the error is displayed when trigger is lost before the target in a specific step is reached.

4519 Info Premature torque loss Socket has slipped off the nut.

4520 Info Result Target Reached Before Final Step

Target torque reached before final step in tightening program.

4521 Info Result Post View Torque Low Post view torque below minimum level.

4522 Info Result Post View Torque High Post view torque exceeded maximum level.

Post view torque interval not reached.

4523 Info Result Post View Torque Interval Not Reached

4524 Info Result Torque Compensation Interval Not Reached

Torque compensation interval angle before rundown end not reached.

from a NOK tightening detailed status.

4525 Info Result Tool movement exceeded

Current monitoring error.

4526 Info Result SafetyCurrMon Sensor Mismatch

4527 Info Result Tool movement exceeded

4528 Info Result Soft Start Angle High Soft start angle exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

4529 Info Result Soft Start Angle Low Soft start angle below minimum level (Four Step).

4530 Info Result First Angle High First step angle exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

4531 Info Result First Angle Low First step angle below minimum level (Four Step).

4532 Info Result First Torque High First step torque exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

4533 Info Result First Torque Low First step torque below minimum level (Four Step).

4534 Info Result First Time High First step time exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

Event

Description Procedure Log Display Ack Code Type Name

4535 Info Result First Time Low First step time below minimum level (Four Step).

4536 Info Result Final Time High Final step time exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

4537 Info Result Final Time Low Final step time below minimum level (Four Step).

Final Supervision Torque was not reached.

4538 Info Result Final Supervision Torque Low

4539 Info Result Soft Start Time High Soft start time exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

4540 Info Result Soft Start Time Low Soft start time below minimum level (Four Step).

4543 Info Result Snug Monitor High Wrench only. Monitor detected snug value exceeded.

4545 Info Result No Residual Torque Wrench only. Residual torque was under threshold.

4546 Info Result Overspeed Wrench only. Wrench gyro failed to measure angle due to high speed.

4547 Info Result Effective Loosening Wrench only. Wrench detected unexpected loosening.

4548 Info Result Final Less Than Target Final torque is below target torque set in tightening program.

4549 Info TurboTight time limit exceeded TurboTight time limit exceeded.

4550 Info Result Rundown Pulses High Maximum number of rundown pulses is exceeded.

4551 Info Result Rundown Pulses Low Rundown is completed before the minimum number of rundown pulses is reached.

4552 Info Result Final Pulses High maximum number of pulses is exceeded.

4553 Info Result Final Pulses Low Tightening is completed before the minimum number of pulses is reached.

4554 Info Current at shutoff high Current at shut off exceeded Current Limit High.

4555 Info Current at shutoff low Shut off current measured was below Current Limit Low

4556 Info Uncategorized multistep error. An error in the multistep configuration, often in conjunction with tool validation.

4557 Info Result overload X X

X X

The parameter in the selected tightening program are invalid.

Check the configuration of the selected tightening program to find and change the value of the parameter.

parameter value

Press push start to start the tool. X X

5020 Info Main trigger is not the active start source

Generated when configured for push start only and user presses main trigger. Will be generated until user presses the push start.

5030 Info Tightening program complexity exceeds tool Capacity

The selected tightening program is too complex for the STB tool used. Tool will be locked.

Reduce complexity of the tightening program, or choose different program

X X

6010 Info Accessory connected Accessory is connected to the controller. X X

6020 Info Accessory disconnected Accessory is disconnected from the controller. X X

Change address on accessory. X X X

Intermittent communication error with accessory. Check cables and connectors. X X

error

6050 Info Wrong socket selected Generated when no or incorrect socket is selected. X X

When no unique serial number is found. Configure the barcode reader device. X X X

identified

7010 Info Message text to display General event for displaying of messages. None X

8200 Info Failed to Open Serial Port Serial port to be used could not be opened. Check serial port connections. X

8214 Error EHMI Software version mismatch

EHMI software version does not match in compatibility with the controller.

Update the software version of the EHMI. X X

NOK Results List

Error message Description GUI location

Drive error Internal driver error or driver loss detected. N/A

Rehit Attempt to tighten an already tightened bolt. Tightening parameters (Edit) > Rehit detection

Soft start torque below min Soft start torque below minimum level. [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 1) Soft Start > Torque min

Soft start torque above max Soft start torque exceeded maximum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 1) Soft Start > Torque max

Selftap torque above max Selftap torque exceeded maximum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Selftap > Torque max

Selftap torque below min Selftap torque below minimum limit. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Selftap > Torque min

Safety torque limit low Automatically calculated torque value to ensure torque sensor is mounted correctly.

N/A

Rundown torque above max Rundown torque exceeded maximum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Rundown torque limits > Torque max

Rundown angle above max Rundown angle exceeded maximum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Rundown angle limits > Angle max

Rundown time exceeded maximum limit. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Rundown angle limits > Time max

Rundown exceeded max time limit

Rundown below min time limit Rundown time below minimum limit. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Rundown angle limits > Time min

Rundown torque below min Rundown torque below minimum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Rundown torque limits > Torque min

Rundown angle below min Rundown angle below minimum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Rundown angle limits > Angle min

Final step torque above max Final step torque exceeded maximum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Final step > Torque limits Manual > Torque max

Final step angle above max Final step angle exceeded maximum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Final step > Angle max

Final step torque below min Final step torque below minimum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Final step > Torque limits Manual > Torque min

Final step angle below min Final step angle below minimum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Final step > Angle max

Tightening timeout Tightening time limit exceeded. [Multistep] Tightening parameters (Edit) > Step dependent

[Other tightening programs]: fixed parameter set to 30 seconds

Trigger lost Tool trigger was released before target was reached. [Multistep]: trigger release before tightening step target has been reached

[Other tightening programs]: trigger release before tightening stage has finished

Slip off Socket has slipped off the nut. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Tightening parameters > Slipoff detection time

Target reached before final step Target torque reached before final step in tightening program.

Target torque

Post view torque below min Post view torque below minimum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Post view torque > Torque min

Post view torque above max Post view torque exceeded maximum level. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Post view torque > Torque max

Post view torque interval not reached. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 2) Post view torque > Torque min length

Post view torque interval not reached

Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Torque compensation > Torque compensation point

Torque compensation interval not reached

Torque compensation interval angle before rundown end not reached.

Tool movement exceeded Tool was moved beyond set angle limits. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 1) TrueAngle compensation (On); Tool movement limits > Positive/Negative

Current monitoring error Current monitoring error. Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 1) Current monitoring (On)

Soft start angle above max Soft start angle exceeded maximum level. [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 1) Soft start > Angle max

Error message Description GUI location

Soft start angle below min Soft start angle below minimum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 1) Soft start > Angle min

First step angle high First step angle exceeded maximum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) First step > First angle max

First step angle low First step angle below minimum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) First step > First angle min

First step torque high First step torque exceeded maximum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) First step > First torque max

First step torque below min First step torque below minimum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) First step > First torque min

First step time exceeded maximum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) First step > Time max

First step exceeded max time limit

First step below min time limit First step time below minimum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) First step > Time min

Final step time exceeded maximum level (Four Step). [TurboTight, Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Final step > Time max

Final step exceeded max time limit

Final step below min time limit Final step time below minimum level (Four Step). [TurboTight, Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Final step > Time min

Low torque at final supervision Final Supervision Torque was not reached. [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Torque limits (manual) > Torque min

Soft start exceeded max time limit

Soft start time exceeded maximum level (Four Step). [Four Step] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 1) Soft start > Time max

TurboTight time limit exceeded TurboTight time limit exceeded. [TurboTight] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) Final step > Time max

Snug monitor high Wrench only. Monitor detected snug value exceeded. Tightening parameters (Edit) > Rundown stage (Step 2) Rundown complete > Rundown complete torque

No residual torque Wrench only. Residual torque was under threshold. [TurboTight] + [TensorPulse] Tightening parameters (Edit) > (Step 3) > Tightening parameters > Residual torque correlation factor

Overspeed Wrench only. Wrench gyro failed to measure angle due to high speed.

N/A

Troubleshooting and Service

This section provides assistance in troubleshooting problems, should they arise, and contains information to help you maintain and service the product.

Troubleshooting: WLAN and Bluetooth

Problem Possible cause Solution

Failed pairing (WLAN) Tool has been restarted and lost connection to the controller Pair tool with the controller

Failed pairing (WLAN) Other tools are being paired at the same time Make sure all other tools have exited pairing mode

Failed pairing (WLAN) Tool is out of range Move the tool closer to the controller and make sure you have a clear line of sight to the controller

Failed pairing (Bluetooth) Other tools are being paired at the same time Make sure all other tools have exited pairing mode

Failed pairing (Bluetooth) Tool is out of range Move the tool closer to the controller and make sure you have a clear line of sight to the controller

Failed pairing (Bluetooth) Interference from other tools The Bluetooth module can be sensitive; make sure to move other Bluetooth devices further away from the controller, or switch them off if possible

Failed pairing (Bluetooth) All six slots have been filled and all six tools have been assigned to a Virtual Station

Remove one of the existing paired tools from the Virtual Station (in the Virtual Station menu, in the Tool field)

Tool disappeared from the Tool list (Bluetooth)

When pairing additional tools, existing tools will disappear from the connected tools list (in the Tools menu)

Press the tool trigger to make it appear in the list again

Tool disappeared from the Tool list (Bluetooth)

Tools may disappear from the list when the tool has been outside radio coverage

Make sure to be inside the radio coverage area and press the tool trigger to make it appear in the list again

Reference

In this section, you can find miscellaneous useful information.

Terms and Definitions

batch sequence

controller GUI user interface at controller buttons or touch screen

event controller and tool status signals

final angle actual measured angle value at the end of the tightening cycle

final torque actual measured torque value at the end of the tightening cycle

GUI user interface made up of interactive graphical elements such as windows, icons and symbols on a display

HMI Human Machine Interface

user interface to tool or controller The HMI can be a computer web-based interface or controller touch screen.

IAM Intelligent Application Module

removable module in controller containing program, configuration parameters and tightening results

line structure sorting and grouping controllers in structures, folders or sub- folders in ToolsTalk

The line structure is a method for improving the visibility of a large group of controllers in a structured manner.

post view torque

function for monitoring and detecting torque maximum and minimum values before rundown is complete

One purpose of post view torque is the use of a self-locking nut.

Tightening program

Parameter set configuration of parameters and values to control and monitor a single tightening action, and to store the tightening result

push transfer of data saved in ToolsTalk to the controller memory

QIF Quality Integrated Fastening

fully integrated line of nutrunners, controllers, accessories and process monitoring tools to guarantee high quality and traceability of tightening in industrial assembly systems

QIF was developed at Atlas Copco and is preferably used in motor vehicle industry and other assembly situations where many joints are critical. The QIF concept also includes process monitoring and documentation.

QIF accessory accessory for operator communication and guidance used in QIF Accessory products used for communication between system and operator. For example: scanner, operator panel, stacklight and socket selector. The communication provides improved quality and traceability in the assembly process.

quick step tightening strategy A tightening strategy to reduce the joint’s preload scatter by combining an initial step with a given speed and torque and then reducing the speed in the final step.

Re-hit detection

detection of re-tightening of an already tightened joint

rotate tightening strategy which rotates the tool head. Rotate is mainly used for test or demonstration purposes.

rundown complete

end of the rundown step, when the screw head is in contact with the surface and the tightening step begins

rundown step step when a bolt enters the thread until the bolt head touches the surface

snug screw or bolt is approximately finger-tight to the surface

socket selector

QIF accessory, consisting of a socket tray with lamps, that can be used to guide an operator to the correct socket

soft start start tightening at slow speed during a specified rotation angle The function helps the bolt to enter the thread in a well controlled way and may prevent unwanted ergonomic tool movement when the trigger is pressed.

stacklight QIF accessory, which handles the communication between operator and controller through digital signals like lamps, buttons, switches and buzzer

target desired result of a tightening The target is expressed in torque or angle.

target angle desired angle value at the end of the tightening cycle, measured from a reference point

target torque desired torque value at the end of the tightening cycle

three step tightening strategy A tightening strategy to reduce the joint’s preload scatter and relaxation effects with an initial step with a given speed and torque followed by a short loosening step before the final tightening at reduced speed.

tightening step

step from when a bolt head has reached the surface until the tightening has reached the desired target torque or target angle

tightening strategy

algorithm which continuously controls and monitors the tightening process

The user can select a strategy optimized for the joint and program certain parameters.

TurboTight tightening strategy A tightening strategy based on the tool’s maximum speed to perform fast and ergonomic tightening. The strategy requires only a target torque value to be set.

two step tightening strategy A tightening strategy to reduce the joint’s preload scatter and relaxation effects with an initial step with a given speed and torque, followed by a short-term stop, before the final tightening at reduced speed.

web GUI user interface to controller through web browser window from a remote computer

virtual station virtual controller software abstraction of a physical controller to behave like multiple controllers

A controller can have only one cable tool connected to it, but several wireless tools. Each tool is connected to its own virtual station.

Virtual station type

License containing a bundle of controller features. This license is required for running a virtual station.

Virtual station feature

License for individual features. Can be used to complement Virtual station type licenses.

License for controller-wide features, such as Soft PLC and StepSync.

Controller feature

Are assigned to an entire controller and can be used by all virtual stations.

Input Signals

Abort Sequence - 10012

When a Batch sequence abort request is received, the Batch sequence functionality aborts the batch sequence only after getting the ongoing tightening result.

Name in SoftPLC: ABORT_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Acknowledge Events - 10004

Acknowledge of an event.

Name in SoftPLC: ACKNOWLEDGE_EVENT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Activate Tool Scanner - 10075

Activates the tool scanner through an external source.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVATE_TOOL_SCANNER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Decrement - 10002

Incrementally decreases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_DECREMENT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Increment - 10001

Incrementally increases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_INCREMENT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Identifier - 10123

In source batch string used to bypass an identifier string in string receiving sequence.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Tightening Program - 10008

Skips the next tightening program in the running batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: BYPASS_PSET

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Fieldbus - 10049

Disables the fieldbus.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_FIELDBUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable tool - 30000

If the signal is set to True, a tool is immediately stopped and locked.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Disable Tool Scanner - 10119

Disables tool scanner when scanning by tool trigger when signal is set. It is still possible to scan by using the scan button but the scan string is ignored.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_TOOL_SCANNER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Dynamic Batch Size - 10074

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

External OK - 10063

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus Lock Loosening - 20021

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a loosening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory. An ongoing loosening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Loosening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Fieldbus Lock Tightening - 20020

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a tightening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory. An ongoing tightening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Tightening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Flush Read Result Queue - 30005

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE_TPID

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Lock Loosening - 20003

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tightening - 20002

Tool locked for tightening by digital input.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active High - 20004

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active Low - 20061

Locks the tool when this signal is low.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Manual Mode - 10061

Used to set the Virtual Station in manual mode.

If the signal is True (high) the signal 101 - Manual mode is high. If the signal is False (low) the signal 101 - Manual mode is low.

Name in SoftPLC: SET_MANUAL_MODE

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Master Unlock - 10005

Unlocks most locks defined in lock page.

Name in SoftPLC: MASTER_UNLOCK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Pulse Stop - 10030

If this signal is generated any ongoing tightening or loosening will be stopped. Used in combination with 10024 or 10072.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_STOP_PULSE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Read Result Handshake Ack - 30004

Enable the Read Result Handshake feature in the Fieldbus device for making the controller available for the signal Rear Result Handshake Ack.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Reset All Identifiers - 10115

In Source batch string used to reset all received string identifiers from string receiving sequence at once. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_ALL_IDENTIFIERS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch - 10003

Resets the batch counter to 0. No batch OK (nxOK). If batch OK is activated, it will be deactivated.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch Sequence - 10053

Resets the Batch Sequence. Unlocks a tool that is locked by Tool Lock on Complete.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Bistable Relay - 10022

Reset the bistable relay output.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BISTABLE_RELAY

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Latest Identifier - 10114

In Source batch string used to reset latest received string from string receiving sequence. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_LATEST_IDENTIFIER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Relays - 10120

Resets all signals.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_RELAYS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Sequence Status - 10118

Resets signals Batch Sequence Done/OK/NOK and Sequence Aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_SEQUENCE_STATUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Too Many NOK - 10013

Reset the batch after receiving lock Too Many NOK

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_TOO_MANY_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input - 10020

Selects Tightening Program withing Source Tightening/Batch within sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_INPUT_VALUE

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Select Input and Dynamic Batch Size - 30007

It is used to set the Batch Size for a specific "Identifier Number" in a Source Tightening Task, running "External batch control".

Batch size can be set to 1-250.

If Batch size is set to 0, it is treated as infinite batch. The user is not able to un-set a Batch back to a state where it has no size, once it has been set.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Select Input Bit 0 - 10016

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_0

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 1 - 10017

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_1

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 2 - 10018

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_2

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 3 - 10019

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_3

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 4 - 10066

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_4

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 5 - 10067

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_5

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 6 - 10068

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_6

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 7 - 10069

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_7

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 8 - 10070

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_8

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 9 - 10071

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_9

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Loosening - 10029

Selects loosening as default operation mode and used in combination with Start Tools -10028 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_LOOSENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Next Identifier Number - 10116

It is possible to use the signal Select Next Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

Batch Sequence

Source Tightening

Source Batch

Number Identifier method

String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Next Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Next Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number. If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 1,2,4,5,1,2,4... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the next identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task. The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the next larger one.

When the biggest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next bigger identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the identifier number has been added to the Source Tightening list, but no tightening program has ever been assigned to it, it is skipped while looping through the Source Tightening list.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Next Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Next Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Next Identifier Number iterates and selects 1,2,4,8,0,1,2...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Next Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_NEXT_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117

It is possible to use the signal Select Previous Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

Batch Sequence

Source Tightening

Source Batch

Number Identifier method

String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number. If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 5,4,2,1,5,4,2... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the previous identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task. The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the previous lower one.

When the smallest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next smaller identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number iterates and selects 8,4,2,1,0,8,4...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Previous Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_PREVIOUS_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Set Bistable Relay - 10021

Set the bistable relay output.

Name in SoftPLC: SET_BISTABLE_RELAY

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Socket Selector External Green Light - 10046

Byte0 - logical sockets 1-4

Byte1 - logical sockets 5-8

Byte2 - logical sockets 9-12

Byte3 - logical sockets 13-16

Byte4 - logical sockets 17-20

Byte5 - logical sockets 21-24

Byte6 - logical sockets 25-28

Byte7 - logical sockets 29-32

2 bits per socket, 00=off, 01=flash, 10=solid

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_SEL_EXT_GREEN_LIGHT

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Socket Selector External Red Light - 10047

Byte0 - logical sockets 1-4

Byte1 - logical sockets 5-8

Byte2 - logical sockets 9-12

Byte3 - logical sockets 13-16

Byte4 - logical sockets 17-20

Byte5 - logical sockets 21-24

Byte6 - logical sockets 25-28

Byte7 - logical sockets 29-32

2 bits per socket, 00=off, 01=flash, 10=solid

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_SEL_EXT_RED_LIGHT

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Soft PLC Lock Loosening - 20041

This signal is used to lock loosening from the SoftPLC.

Name in SoftPLC: LOCK_LOOSENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Soft PLC Lock Tightening - 20040

This signal is used to lock tightening from the SoftPLC.

Name in SoftPLC: LOCK_TIGHTENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Start Loosening - 10011

Active signal starts loosening. Once digital input goes inactive the loosening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_LOOSENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening - 10010

Active signal starts tightening. Once input goes inactive the tightening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_TIGHTENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening Pulse - 10024

The tightening starts at signal. Runs until the tightening is finished, or until the 30 sec timeout in tightening program occurs.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_START_PULSE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tools - 10028

Active signal which starts the tool (default operation mode is tightening). As soon as signal goes inactive the tool must be stopped. Used in combination with Select Loosening - 10029 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: START_DRIVE_CONTINIOUS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To SoftPLC - 10065

Name in SoftPLC: TO_PLC

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051

Unlocks a tool that is locked by "Tool Lock on Complete".

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_COMPLETE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Disable - 10059

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_DISABLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Output Signals

Set when an identifier string has been received and accepted by the work-task; it is necessary that even sequence or tightening program are running. If running Source batch-string, it is set when all scans have been received and a sequence had been selected. In that case it includes concatenated string consisted of saved positions. For other work-tasks it includes the “VIN” number.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_IDENTIFIER_STRING

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_1

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_2

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_3

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active. The strings is filtered with saved position. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_4

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

The batch counter is equal to the batch size number. Result can be OK or NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Current number in the batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COUNT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates that a batch in a batch sequence is running.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_RUNNING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch sequence finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch sequence finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates when a sequence is completed, both in case Batch Sequence Completed OK and Batch Sequence Completed NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_COMPLETED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Indicates if the Batch Sequence is running or not.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCHSEQUENCE_RUNNING

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Bistable Relay is a signal controlled by the inputs "Set Bistable Relay" and "Reset Bistable Relay". After receiving the input "Set Bistable Relay", Bistable Relay signal is set to True. After receiving the input "Reset Bistable Relay", Bistable Relay signal is set to False.

If "Set Bistable Relay" or "Reset Bistable Relay" goes low, the Bistable relay keeps its state. The state for the Bistable relay changes when "Set Bistable Relay" or "Reset Bistable Relay" goes high.

After restarting the controller, the Bistable relay is set to False as default.

Name in SoftPLC: BISTABLE_RELAY

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

The Calibration alarm from the Tool maintenance configuration. Provides a reminder for when it is time to calibrate the tool.

Name in SoftPLC: CALIBRATION_ALARM

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: CONFIGURATION_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Set to true at start up of IO Exchange

Name in SoftPLC: IO_ON

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Shows the index of the current running batch in a sequence. If socket selector is used it will show zero if none, more than one or wrong socket is selected. For source tightening it will show 1 if batch mode is used and a batch is running.

Name in SoftPLC: CURRENT_RUNNING_BATCH_IX

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

The direction switch on the tool is turned in counter clockwise direction.

Name in SoftPLC: DIRECTION_SWITCH_CCW

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

The direction switch on the tool is turned in clockwise direction.

Name in SoftPLC: DIRECTION_SWITCH_CW

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Emergency Stop - 20036

Name in SoftPLC: EMERGENCY_STOP

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Event Code - 30001

Relay an event when it is triggered. Momentary, on for two cycle times.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Event Code Severity - 30003

Event Code Severity is an output signal which is activated when the triggered event has severity of error or warning.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE_SEVERITY

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates if event is triggered. It is only triggered on accessories if event requires an ACK.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_PRESENT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: FIELDBUS_DISCONNECTED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Final Angle - 31003

Actual measured Angle value at the end of the tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_ANGLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Angle Status - 31006

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_ANGLE_STATUS

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Final Measured Current - 31017

Current at the measurement step of final angle and final torque. It is sent when a result is available.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Final Target Speed - 31020

The target speed of the last step of the tightening program.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Target Torque - 31015

Gets the target torque of the tightening program for a performed tightening. The value is copied from the program of the tightening result and is published after the tightening.

The Multistep programs retrieve the Target Torque from the last tightening step in the tightening program defined as Step Category "Final".

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Final Torque - 31002

Actual measured torque value at the end of the tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_TORQUE

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Torque Status - 31009

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_TORQUE_STATUS

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

First Target Torque - 31019

Retrieves the first target torque after a completed tightening.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

From SoftPLC - 10064

Allocated bytes for data transfer from PLC to accessories.

Name in SoftPLC: FROM_PLC

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus:FALSE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Angle result is too high.

Name in SoftPLC: HIGH_ANGLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Torque result is higher than maximum torque limit.

Name in SoftPLC: HIGH_TORQUE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: IDENTIFIER_RECEIVED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Set directly when an identifier has been received in the work-task. For Source batch-string, it is set at every scanning in scan process, thus it is changed for every scanning and sent even if it does not match in length. String set is in raw format and not only "saved positions" in the string. For other work-tasks this signal is equal to Active Identifier String signal.

Name in SoftPLC: LAST_RECEIVED_ID_STRING

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Indicates that the connection to the Atlas Copco license server has been lost or the synchronization has failed. The signal is cleared when the License manager synchronization has been done successfully

Name in SoftPLC: LICENSE_SERVER_CONN_LOST

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the loosening is externally locked by any of the following signals:

20003 - Lock Loosening

20004 - Lock Tool Active High

20033 - Line Control Lock

20018 - Open Protocol Lock

20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_DISABLED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the loosening is not externally locked by any of the following signals:

20003 - Lock Loosening

20004 - Lock Tool Active High

20033 - Line Control Lock

20018 - Open Protocol Lock

20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_ENABLED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

The loosening is disabled.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

NOK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

OK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Angle result is lower than minimum angle limit.

Name in SoftPLC: LOW_ANGLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Torque result is lower than minimum torque limit.

Name in SoftPLC: LOW_TORQUE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates on any supported and configured accessory the Virtual Station status for manual mode

Name in SoftPLC: MANUAL_MODE

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Indicates Max coherent NOK tightening counter is reachead.

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_COHERENT_NOK_REACHED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Open End in Open Position - 89

Open End tool in open position.

Name in SoftPLC: OPEN_END_IN_OPEN_POSITION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

If Open Protocol is set to off in the Virtual Station, "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to False. If Open Protocol is turned on in the Virtual Station the "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to True. When at least one client (several Open Protocol clients can connect to the same Virtual Station) is connected the "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to False.

Name in SoftPLC: OPEN_PROTOCOL_DISCONNECTED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Output signal for sending a scanned string from a scanner to an external device.

Name in SoftPLC: BARCODE_ID_PASSTHROUGH

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

This signal indicates the torque level when the tightening cycle is complete. A timer - Program end timeout - starts when the torque falls below this level. Tightening is complete when the torque has fallen below the level for Program end torque and stayed there until Program end timeout has been reached.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_END

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Defines the starting level for a tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_START

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Pulse Tool Alarm Oil Level Empty - 167

Oil level supervision configured in the Tool maintenance, provides a mechanism to remind the users when it is time to fill up oil on a pulse tool. The signal does not notify the user when the trigger gets pressed. The signal is cleared when tool is disconnected; then, it is sent again from the tool if the condition prevails next time the tool is connected.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_OIL_LEVEL_EMPTY

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

PVT Compensate Value - 31029

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Read Result Queue Flushed - 30006

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

If a tool is connected to the virtual station, there is not any active tightening locks, emergency stop is not activated, and a valid Tightening Program is selected, this signal indicates that it is possible to start a tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: READY_TO_START

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 1 might not correspond to the first configured string, but to the first received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_1

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 2 might not correspond to the second configured string, but to the second received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_2

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 3 might not correspond to the third configured string, but to the third received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_3

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string. Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 4 might not correspond to the fourth configured string, but to the fourth received string. The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied. Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_4

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Rehit - 31014

Name in SoftPLC: FIELDBUS_TIGHTENING_REHIT

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Remaining tightenings in a batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: REMAINING_BATCH

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Rundown Angle - 31038

Value of the rundown angle.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

This signal is active if the rundown angle on the program level is higher than the set one.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE_HIGH

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

This signal is active if the rundown angle on the program level is lower than the set one.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE_LOW

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_0

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_1

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_2

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_3

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_4

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_5

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_6

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_7

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_8

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_9

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Shows the index of the selected batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_BATCH_SEQUENCE_ID

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

The actual id of a selected tightening program; 0 if no tightening program selected.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PSET_ID

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Selected Tightening Program Bit 0 - 148

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_0

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 1 - 149

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_1

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 2 - 150

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_2

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 3 - 151

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_3

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 4 - 152

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_4

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 5 - 153

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_5

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 6 - 154

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_6

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 7 - 155

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_7

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 8 - 156

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_8

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 9 - 157

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_9

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: FALSE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Output signal indicating if sequence was aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: SEQUENCE_ABORTED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Service alarm configured in the Tool maintenance, provides a mechanism to remind the users when it is time to service the tool.

Name in SoftPLC: SERVICE_INDICATOR_ALARM

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Shows the size of the currently running sequence. Only set when a sequence is loaded and not reset when sequence is done.

Name in SoftPLC: SIZE_OF_RUNNING_SEQUENCE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Socket Selector Disconnected Lock - 20039

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MAJOR_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MINOR_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Version of the software running.

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_RELEASE_VERSION

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Start Final Angle - 31016

The Start Final Angle torque value is shown if available. It is sent when a result is available.

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Indicates when the Virtual Station is ready.

Name in SoftPLC: STATION_READY

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Selected tightening program has counterclockwise chosen as thread direction.

Name in SoftPLC: THREAD_DIRECTION_CCW

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Date - 31030

Tightening date in the format YYYY:MM:DD.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Date Day - 31032

Day of month when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE_DAY

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Date Month - 31033

Month when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE_MONTH

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Date Year - 31034

Year when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE_YEAR

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the tightening is externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening

20004 - Lock Tool Active High

20033 - Line Control Lock

20018 - Open Protocol Lock

20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DISABLED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Done - 31010

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DONE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Enabled is an output signal which is activated when the tightening is not externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening

20004 - Lock Tool Active High

20033 - Line Control Lock

20018 - Open Protocol Lock

20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_ENABLED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

The tightening is disabled; it is not possible to make any tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

At least one result of the tightening is outside the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_NOK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

The result of the tightening is within the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_OK

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Program Max Angle - 31004

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_ANGLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Program Max Torque - 31007

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_TORQUE

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Tightening Program Min Angle - 31005

Name in SoftPLC: MIN_ANGLE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Program Min Torque - 31008

Name in SoftPLC: MIN_TORQUE

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Tightening Time - 31031

Tightening time in the format hh:mm:ss.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates if NOK tightenings occurred due to execution time exceeding the maximum allowed.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Time Hour - 31035

Hour when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME_HOUR

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates if NOK tightenings occurred due to execution time lowering the minimum allowed.

Tightening Time Low signal works only for Tightening Programs.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Time Minute - 31037

Minute when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME_MINUTES

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Time Second - 31036

Second when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME_SEC

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_BATTERY_LOW

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates if a tool is connected or not to a Virtual Station.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_CONNECTED

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Tool Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the tool is externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening

20003 - Lock Loosening

20004 - Lock Tool Active High

20033 - Line Control Lock

20018 - Open Protocol Lock

20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_DISABLED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Enabled is an output signal which is activated when the tool is not externally disabled by any of the following signals:

20002 - Lock Tightening

20003 - Lock Loosening

20004 - Lock Tool Active High

20033 - Line Control Lock

20018 - Open Protocol Lock

20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ENABLED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Output signal tracking the Function button state. The signal is set when the Function button is pressed and cleared when the Function button is released. Not for critical use in case of battery tools.

Name in SoftPLC: FUNCTION_BUTTON_PRESSED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Health OK is High when there is no tool error present, while Tool Health OK is Low when any of the following tool errors are set:

Tool Overheated

Tool Requires motor tuning

Open End not tuned

Tool parameter file not supported

Tool battery empty

Tool trigger supervision failure

Tool cable not supported

Tool memory failure

Tool memory corrupt

Tool service interval expired

Tool software version mismatch

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Indicates that the tool is loosening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_LOOSENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool rotation direction is counterclockwise for left-handed threaded screws.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ROTATION_CCW

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool rotation direction is clockwise for right-handed threaded screws.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ROTATION_CW

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Indicates that the tool is rotating (clockwise [CW] or counter-clockwise [CCW]).

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RUNNING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Serial Number Numeric - 31021

Integer part of the serial number.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Name in SoftPLC: TOOLTAG_IDENTIFIER

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates that the tool is tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_TIGHTENING

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Total Number of Tightenings - 31018

Total number of the tightenings performed by the tool over its entire lifetime.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Indicates that the tool trigger has been pressed.

Name in SoftPLC: TRIGGER_PRESSED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Provides the virtual station name.

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Input/Output Signals

Clears status of other signals set to next tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: CLEAR_RESULTS

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Open Protocol Commands - 10060

Disables the possibility to send commands over Open Protocol to the Virtual Station.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_OPEN_PRTCOL_CMDS

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Identifier - 10045

The string sent in External identifier is included in the result as VIN number. It is possible to provide up to 2 identifiers to be passed from Fieldbus for task selection.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_IDENTIFIER

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 1 - 10035

External Monitored 1 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_1

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 2 - 10036

External Monitored 2 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_2

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 3 - 10037

External Monitored 3 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_3

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 4 - 10038

External Monitored 4 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_4

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 5 - 10039

External Monitored 5 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_5

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 6 - 10040

External Monitored 6 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_6

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 7 - 10041

External Monitored 7 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_7

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

External Monitored 8 - 10042

External Monitored 8 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_8

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Fieldbus Keep Alive - 30002

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Flash Tool Green Led (external protocol) - 10058

Name in SoftPLC: FLASH_TOOL_GREEN_LED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 1 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_1

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 10 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_10

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 2 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_2

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 3 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_3

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 4 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_4

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 5 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_5

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 6 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_6

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 7 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_7

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 8 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_8

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Input/Output 9 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_9

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_1

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_10

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_2

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_3

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_4

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_5

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_6

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_7

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_8

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_9

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Socket Lifted - 10014

Is generated when a unique socket is lifted on socket selector (integer = socket ID), no socket is lifted (integer = 0) or when more than one is lifted (integer = 0).

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_LIFTED

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Socket Lifted Raw - 10043

Added to support backwards compatibility with PF4000 in certain protocols for socket lifted notifications (as opposed to Socket Lifted 10013). Integer is bit pattern for all lifted sockets (regardless of flashing or how many is lifted).

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_LIFTED_RAW

Converter Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_IN_PRODUCT_SPACE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_IN_WORK_SPACE

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander: TRUE

User ID - 10050

Name in SoftPLC: USER_ID

Signal Type Value Type Size Min [bit] Size Max [bit]

Devices

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander: FALSE

Third Party Licenses

List of Third-Party Licenses

Power Focus controllers incorporate third party components whose licenses require us to publish copies of the licensing language and/or copyright notices. In compliance with those requirements, here are copies of the licenses. Please, click on any of the licenses below to show a copy of the license text.

Software Version Licenses

acl 2.2.52 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

alsa-lib 1.1.2 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

alsa-state 0.2.0 MIT

alsa-tools 1.1.0 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.0

Software Version Licenses

alsa-utils 1.1.2 GPL v2.0

anybus 1.1 Proprietary

atftp 0.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + be3291a18c GPL v2.0

attr 2.4.47 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

barebox 2018.06.0 GPL v2.0

base-files 3.0.14 GPL v2.0

base-files-px2-base 1.0 MIT

base-passwd 3.5.29 GPL v2.0

bash 4.3.30 GPL v3.0

bash-completion 2.4 GPL v2.0

bluez5 5.41 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

boost 1.61.0 MIT

BSL v1.0

Python v2.0

busybox-px2base 1.24.1 GPL v2.0

bzip v2.0

bzip2 1.0.6 bzip v2.0

ca-certificates 20160104 GPL v2.0

MPL v2.0

cppunit 1.13.1 LGPL v2.1

cryptodev-linux 1.8 GPL v2.0

curl 7.50.1 MIT

db 3.0.35 AGPL v3.0

dbus 1.10.10 GPL v2.0

AFL v2.0

dhcp 4.3.4 ISC

dosfstools 4.0 GPL v3.0

dt-utils 2017.03.0 GPL v2.0

e2fsprogs 1.43 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.0

BSD

MIT

ecryptfs-tools 1.0 GPL v1.0

elfutils 0.166 GPL v3.0

Elfutils-Exception

eudev 3.2.2 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

expat 2.2.0 MIT

fbset 2.1 GPL v2.0

fb-test 1.1.0 GPL v2.0

fcgi 2.4.0 OML

finit 3.1 MIT

firmware-imx 5.4 Proprietary

flac 1.3.1 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

BSD

GFDL v1.2

flatbuffers 1.9.0 Apache v2.0

fruit 3.4.0 + gitAUTOINC + ece0f7218c Apache v2.0

fuse 2.9.4 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.0

gcc-runtime 6.2.0 GPL v3.0 with GCC exception

gdb 8.0.1 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.0

GPL v3.0

LGPL v3.0

gdbm 1.12 GPL v3.0

glib-2.0 2.48.2 LGPL v2.0

BSD

Public Domain License

glibc 2.24 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

gmp 6.1.1 GPL v2.0

LGPL v3.0

gnutls 3.5.3 GPL v3.0

LGPL v2.1

grep 2.25 GPL v3.0

gstreamer1.0 1.8.3 LGPL v2.0

gstreamer1.0-plugins-base 1.8.3 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.0

hostpad 2.6 GPL v2.0

BSD

htop 1.0.3 GPL v2.0

icu 57.1 ICU

init-ifupdown 1.0 GPL v2.0

initscripts 1.0 GPL v2.0

iproute2 4.7.0 GPL v2.0

iptables 1.6.0 GPL v2.0

ipwatchd 1.2 GPL v2.0

iw 4.7 BSD

json-spirit 4.08 MIT

keyutils 1.5.9 GPL v2.0

Software Version Licenses

kmod 23 + gitAUTOINC + 65a885df5f GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

kmsfbwrap-px2base 12.0 GPL v2.0

libarchive 3.2.2 BSD

libbsd 0.8.3 BSD v4 Clause

ISC

Public Domain License

libcap 2.25 GPL v2.0

BSD

libdrm 2.4.70 MIT

libestr 0.1.10 LGPL v2.1

libevent 2.0.22 BSD

libfastjson 0.99.4 MIT

libffi 3.2.1 MIT

libgcc 6.2.0 GPL v3.0 with GCC exception

GPL v3.0

libgcrypt 1.7.3 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

GPL v3.0

libgpg-error 1.24 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

libidn 1.33 LGPL v3.0

LGPL v2.1

GPL v3.0

libite 2.0.2 BSD

ISC

MIT

libjpeg-turbo 1.5.0 BSD v3 Clause

liblogging 1.0.5 BSD

libnet 1.2-rc3 BSD

libnfsidmap 0.25 BSD

libnl 3.2.28 LGPL v2.1

libogg 1.3.2 BSD

libpcap 1.8.1 BSD

libpcre 8.39 BSD

libpng 1.6.24 Libpng

librcf 2.2.0.0 GPL v2.0

libsamplerate0 0.1.8 GPL v2.0

libsndfile1 1.0.27 LGPL v2.1

libtinyxml 2.6.2 Zlib

libtirpc 1.0.1 BSD

libuev 2.2.0 MIT

libusb1 1.0.20 LGPL v2.1

libvorbis 1.3.5 BSD

libxml2 2.9.4 MIT

libxslt 1.1.29 MIT

lighttpd 1.4.51 BSD

linux-atlas 4.14 GPL v2.0

linux-libc-headers 4.14.13 GPL v2.0

logrotate 3.9.1 GPL v2.0

lua 5.1.5 MIT

luabind git MIT

lzo 2.09 GPL v2.0

lzop 1.03 GPL v2.0

memlog 2.0 MIT

mesa 12.0.1 MIT

mg 20161005 Public Domain License

minizip 1.2.8 Zlib

mmc-utils 0.1 GPL v2.0

mtd-utils 1.5.2 GPL v2.0

nano 2.2.5 GPL v3.0

ncurses 6.0 + 20160625 MIT

netbase 5.3 GPL v2.0

netcat-openbsd 1.105 BSD v3 Clause

nettle 3.2 GPL v2.0

LGPL v3.0

nfs-utils 2.1.1 GPL v2.0

BSD

MIT

ntp 4.2.8p8 NTP

openssh 7.6p1 BSD

openssl 1.0.2n openSSL

opkg 0.3.3 GPL v2.0

opkg-arch-config 1.0 MIT

opkg-utils 0.3.2 + gitAUTOINC + 3ffece9bf1 GPL v2.0

orc 0.4.25 BSD v3 Clause

BSD v2 Clause

os-release 1.0 MIT

packagegroup-atlas-qt5 1.0 MIT

packagegroup-atlas-sxb 1.0 MIT

packagegroup-base 1.0 MIT

packagegroup-core-boot 1.0 MIT

packagegroup-core-eclipse-debug 1.0 MIT

Software Version Licenses

packagegroup-core-nfs 1.0 MIT

packagegroup-core-ssh-openssh 1.0 MIT

packagegroup-px2it 1.0 MIT

parted 3.2 GPL v3.0

perl 5.22.1 GPL v1.0

Artistic v1.0

pm-utils 1.4.1 GPL v2.0

poco 1.9.0 BSL v1.0

pointercal 0.0 MIT

popt 1.16 MIT

procps 3.3.12 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.0

protobuf 2.6.1 + gitAUTOINC + bba83652e1 BSD v3 Clause

python 2.7.12 Python v2.0

qtbase 5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + a55f36211e BSD

GPL v2.0

GPL v3.0

GFDL v1.3

LGPL v3.0

The Qt Company Commercial

The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

qtdeclarative 5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 2a992040e2 BSD

GPL v2.0

GPL v3.0

GFDL v1.3

LGPL v3.0

The Qt Company Commercial

The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

qtlocation 5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + de5be121d8 BSD

GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

GFDL v1.3

LGPL v3.0

The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.1

qtsensors 5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 5a57beaaa5 BSD

GPL v2.0

GPL v3.0

GFDL v1.3

LGPL v3.0

The Qt Company Commercial

The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

qtwebkit 5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 76e2732f01 BSD

GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.0

qtwebsockets 5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 60cede232a GFDL v1.3

LGPL v2.1

LGPL v3.0

The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.1

qtxmlpatterns 5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 89dbcc4f80 BSD

GPL v2.0

GPL v3.0

GFDL v1.3

LGPL v3.0

The Qt Company Commercial

The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

rauc 0.4 LGPL v2.1

readline 6.3 GPL v3.0

rpcbind 0.2.3 BSD

rsync 3.1.2 GPL v3.0

rsyslog 8.22.0 Apache v2.0

GPL v3.0

LGPL v3.0

run-postinsts 1.0 MIT

shadow 4.2.1 BSD

Artistic v1.0

shadow-security 4.2.1 MIT

sqlite3 3.14.1 Public Domain License

squashfs-tools 5.7.1 + gitrAUTOINC + 9c1db6d13a Public Domain License

GPL v2.0

st-load 1.0 Public Domain License

stm32flash git GPL v2.0

strace 4.13 BSD

sysfsutils 2.1.0 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

sysvinit-bootlogd 2.88dsf GPL v2.0

tcf-agent 1.4.0 + gitAUTOINC + 2dddd5f440 EDL v1.0

EPL v1.0

tcpdump 4.7.4 BSD

tcp-wrappers 7.6 BSD

tslib 1.1 LGPL v2.0

tzdata 2016i BSD

BSD v3 Clause

Public Domain License

u-boot-atlas 2017.09 GPL v2.0

u-boot-fw-utils 2017.09 GPL v2.0

unzip 6.0 BSD v3 Clause

usbutils 008 GPL v2.0

Software Version Licenses

util-linux 2.28.1 BSD

GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

wireless-tools 30.pre9 BSD

GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

MPL v1.1

wpa-supplicant 2.5 BSD

xerces-c 2.7.0 Apache v2.0

xz 5.2.2 GPL v2.0

LGPL v2.1

GPL v3.0 with autoconf exception

Public Domain License

yaml-cpp 0.6.2 MIT

zip 3.0 BSD v3 Clause

zlib 1.2.8 Zlib

Power Focus 6000 | 3.4 | 8436 1800 02

Published: 2023-08-30